Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and
SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EX88
model only.
Model No. DMR-EX88
DMR-EX78
Region number supported by
this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders
and DVD-Video according to where they are
sold.
t
ar
ide
kSt
≥The region number of this unit is “4”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with
labels containing “4” or “ALL”.
c
i
Gu
u
Q
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of DMR-EX78 unless
otherwise indicated.
Example:
s
n
2
3
4
ALL
c
o
i
4
t
a
r
Basi
ope
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
This DVD recorder is for viewing and
recording free to view channels only, not pay
TV or encrypted channels.
TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does
not support analogue broadcasts.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
Declaration of Conformity (16th November
2007)
No. 5153 (DMR-EX78), No. 5154 (DMR-EX88)
Notice for DVB functions
≥Any function related to DVB (Digital Video
Broadcasting) will work in areas where
DVB-T (MPEG2) digital terrestrial
broadcasting is received. Consult your local
Panasonic dealer with coverage areas.
≥This unit has the capability for DVB
specifications. But future DVB services
cannot be guaranteed.
≥This unit does not support MHP (Multimedia
Home Platform).
RQT9088-L
GN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Editing
Getting started
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ted
Copying
Quick Start Guide
star
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and
g
n
i
t
e
G
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . 13
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . 14
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copying SD Video from an SD card [EX88] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copying SD Video from a video equipment [EX88] . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory
—Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying new still pictures on the SD card
—Copy New Pictures [EX88]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying music from a USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
To update the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
t
ar
ide
kSt
Basic operations
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . 15
Playing recorded video contents
/Playing play-only discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
c
i
Gu
u
Q
s
n
c
o
i
t
a
r
Advanced operations
Basi
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Recording modes and approximate recording times . . . . . . . . . 21
When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 21
When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ope
Setting menus
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 54
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Deleting all the contents—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
s
n
o
ced
n
a
v
erati
p
o
Ad
Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using G-CODE system to make timer recordings
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 58
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
(Analogue broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 25
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
—Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
g
in
t
i
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Ed
g
n
i
y
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cop
Reference
s
u
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . 68
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal. . . . . . . . . . 69
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver . . . . . . . 69
Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
n
e
m
g
n
ti
e
S
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
To pause the TV programme you are watching
e
c
Rfren
About descriptions in these operating instructions
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of
DMR-EX78 unless otherwise indicated.
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
[EX88] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EX88 only.
[EX78] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EX78 only.
≥Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ ±±”.
RQT9088
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Included accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of April 2008. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
∏
∏
∏
(N2QAYB000135)
1
Remote control
2
Batteries
for remote control
1 AC mains lead
1 RF coaxial cable
1 Audio/video cable
For use with this unit only. Do
not use it with other
equipment.
Also, do not use cords for
other equipment with this unit.
The remote control information
∫ Batteries
∫ Use
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
Remote control signal sensor
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
20
20
30
R6/LR6, AA
30
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
7 m directly in front of the unit
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 6)
RQT9088
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
re
a
c
it
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
e/Un
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
car
g
n
i
l
d
n
a
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
h
)
ive
∫ Setup precautions
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
r
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling
fan and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
skd
i
d
d
≥Do not place on anything that
∫ While operating
ar
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
DO NOT
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The
HDD may become damaged.)
H
(
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
HD
This unit
VCR
≥Place in an area where condensation
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
/
n
io
∫ When moving the unit
1Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a
short time.)
rmat
o
f
in
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving
from a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa,
or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD
heads, etc.
l
o
r
t
n
co
e
t
mo
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
re
e
h
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
/T
es
i
r
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
eso
ac
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
d
e
d
u
l
c
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
In
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
DO NOT
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
RQT9088
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
1Turn the unit on (➡ 9)
2Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EX88])] (➡ 16, 17, 32)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4To delete unnecessary recorded titles, still pictures or music
(➡ 19, 43)
5Basic operations for recording and play
6Show digital channel information (➡ 15)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (➡ 27)/Show status messages (➡ 55)
7Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 28)
8Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 29, 38)
9Show OPTION menu (➡ 38)
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.
:Select audio (Analogue broadcast only) (➡ 28)
;Colour buttons
–for TV Guide operations (➡ 27)
>
DVD
TV
1
?
@
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
2
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
3
4 5 6
–for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (➡ 29, 32, 34)
–for switching Video/Playlists (➡ 47)
–for tuning settings (➡ 59)
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
0
7
A
B
C
G-Code
DELETE
<Show on-screen menu (➡ 54)
INPUT
SELECT
4
5
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio etc.
=Recording functions
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (➡ 17)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 17)
>Transmit the remote control signal
?Television operations (➡ 67)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
@Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(➡ 17, 27)
ASelect analogue channel (➡ 17)
BInput select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 23)
CShow G-CODE screen (➡ 24)
DExit the menu screen
STATUS
D
E
6
7
I
EShow the TV Guide screen (➡ 18)
FShow FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 35)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
GReturn to previous screen
8
F
OK
9
OPTION
RETURN
HCreate chapter (➡ 28)
G
H
I
ISkip approx. 1 minute forward (➡ 28)
JShow Timer Recording screen (➡ 24)
KSkip the specified time (➡ 28)
CREATE
CHAPTER
:
;
<
=
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
J
K
RQT9088
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
REC
guide
e
nc
e
r
e
f
e
7 89
: ;
<
lr
o
r
t
[EX88]
=
Pull to flip down the front
panel.
Con
REC
1Standby/on switch (/I) (➡ 9)
7USB port (➡ 14)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2Disc tray (➡ 14)
8Stop (➡ 17, 28)
9Start play (➡ 16)
:Channel select (➡ 17)
3Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 23)
4Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (➡ 23)
5Display (➡ below)
;Start recording (➡ 17)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 17)
<Remote control signal sensor
=[EX88] SD card slot (➡ 14)
6Open/close disc tray (➡ 14)
Rear panel terminals (➡ 8, 68, 69, 70, 71)
The unit’s display
1
2
3
4
REC
PLAY
[EX88]
5
6
9
7
8
1 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast or TV Guide data.
2 Copying indicator
3
Recording
indicator
Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback
indicator
REC
REC
PLAY
PLAY
4Timer recording indicator
5[EX88] SD card slot indicator
6Disc indicator
7Drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EX88])] indicator
8Main display section indicator
9Recording mode indicator
RQT9088
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 1 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (➡ 68) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit
consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the
21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by
connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video
using RGB output on this unit.
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does
not work.
[Required]setting]
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 64)
Connecting a television
Television’s rear panel
To the aerial
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Red White Yellow
RF coaxial cable
(included)
Audio/Video cable
(included)
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
2
Other connections
(➡ below, 68)
3
1 2
4
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
Y
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
Aerial cable
This unit’s rear panel
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV as follows.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[➡ 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
RF
IN
Y
HDMI AV OUT
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
[Required]setting]
Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (➡ 64). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 84) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9088
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
4 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”
and press [OK].
DVD
TV
TV aspect setting screen appears.
DVD
VOL
CH
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
4:3 TV
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
16:9
ings
2 3
1
t
e
Numbered
buttons
Pan & Scan
4 5 6
s
t
Letterbox
ANALOGUE
CH
c
8 9
0
7
SELECT
pe
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
OK
s
a
SELECT
RETURN
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
V
T
5 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
d
n
and press [OK].
STATUS
a
≥16:9:
I
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
tings
t
≥Pan & Scan:
e
OK
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(➡ 84).
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
MANUAL SKIP
ptions
≥Letterbox:
e
c
e
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(➡ 84).
r
l
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
ne
To stop partway
Press [RETURN].
ha
C
2
P
2 Press [ DVD] to turn the unit on.
When clock setting screen is displayed
DVB Auto-Setup starts. The unit will search for the terrestrial
digital channels.
In step 2, if the clock setting screen appears on the television, set
the clock manually.
This is a 24-hour clock.
This takes about 5 minutes.
≥Terrestrial digital channels are stored into logical channels
numbers.
ion/STE
t
c
≥Analogue channels are preset at the time of shipping. If you
would like to add new TV channels, set them manually
(➡ 60).
Clock
one
C
DVB Auto-Setup
Time
0
Date
1
1
P
:
00
:
00
.
1
.
2008
Please wait!
Ch 6
69
Number
0
9
Prog. Channel Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
352
354
ABC
ABC 2
12289
12302
12302 12289
9
9
1
2
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
CHANGE
OK
SELECT
STE
RETURN
1
2
Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change and press
[3, 4] to change the setting.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
RETURN: to cancel
RETURN
DVB Auto-Setup is complete when Region Selection screen
appears.
The time information for your region can be obtained.
Region Selection
Quick Start setting screen appears.
NSW / ACT
Victoria
(➡ Go to step 4)
Queensland
South Australia
Western Australia
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
Northern Territory
SELECT
correctly (➡ 59)
Tasmania
OK
RETURN
∫ To restart set up (➡ 59)
≥If the clock setting screen is displayed (➡ right).
3 Press [3, 4] to select your region
and press [OK].
Quick Start setting screen appears.
Quick Start (➡ 65)
If you select “On”,
– the unit starts recording in about 1 second§ after you press
[¥ REC] while the unit is turned on.
– the unit displays the TV Guide screen in less than 1
second after you press [GUIDE] while the unit is turned off.
§
Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
RQT9088
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Logo
Data that
can be
recorded
and played
Rewritable Play on other Recording 16:9 Recording both M 1
Copy-once
recording
(CPRM)
players§1
aspect picture§2
and M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§2
Standard symbol
Hard disk drive (HDD)
–
Video
Still picture
Music
Video
Still picture
≤
≤
–
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
[HDD]
DVD-RAM
[RAM]
≤
≤
CPRM (➡ 84)
compatible discs
only.
§3
DVD-R
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Video
Video
–
–
≤
≤
≤
≤
–
–
(Either one)
§3
DVD-R DL§4
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
–
–
(Either one)
§3
DVD-RW
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Video
Video
Video
Video
≤
–
≤
≤
≤
≤
–
–
–
–
–
(Either one)
§3
+R
–
–
–
– (4:3 aspect)
– (4:3 aspect)
– (4:3 aspect)
–
[+R] before finalisation
(Either one)
[DVD-V] after finalisation
§3
+R DL§4
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
–
–
(Either one)
§3
+RW
[+RW]
≤
≤
–
(Either one)
§1 [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment (➡ 58).
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-
RAM compatible DVD players.
[Note]
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on
secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this
setting “Off” if high speed copy to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 61).
≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with
another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,
discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.
§2 For further information (➡ 20, Important notes for recording)
§3 The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 62) is
recorded.
§4 [-R]DL] [+R]DL] You cannot directly record to these discs (➡ right).
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary (➡ 57).
≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend
you create top menu (➡ 58).
≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate
recording times” (➡ 21).
≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent
you from playing or recording certain discs.
≥Please see specifications (➡ 83) for compatible disc versions and
recording speeds.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the
recording.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL
disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,
single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is
not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the
remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between
layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit
is switching layers.
∫ Recording format
This unit records video in the following formats.
DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit
television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-
Video.
Second recordable layer
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be
recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.
≥After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and
other equipment.
The available
space
First recordable layer
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way
as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be
recorded.
Title 1
Title 2
(Inner
Playback direction
(Outersection
of the disc)
section of the
disc)
≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the
disc on DVD players and other equipment.
DVD-R DL
+R DL
RQT9088
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Play-only discs
Disc type
Logo
Standard
symbol
[DVD-V]
Uses
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-Video
ion
t
a
m
r
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 57) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
o
inf
c
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
ndis
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX
≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX
Da
H
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
CD
[CD]
–
DivX, MP3,
JPEG
≥CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3
≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG
≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW§)
Video CD
[VCD]
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit
and not finalised (➡ 84).
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”
≥DVD-Audio
TV type
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
Yes/No
≥Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.
Multi-system TV
PAL
NTSC
PAL
≤
≤
PAL TV
≤
NTSC
PAL
≤
§1 (PAL60)
NTSC TV
–
§2
NTSC
≤
§1 If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the
picture will not be shown correctly.
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 64).
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (➡ 64).
RQT9088
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB memory and card information
USB memories you can use on this unit
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP
protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
[EX78] USB memories for USB 2.0 High Speed work as USB 2.0 Full Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
≥
Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
Format
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Indicated in these
instructions by
[USB]
Data that can be played or copied (≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
File format
Playing
DivX
≤
MP3
≤
Still pictures (JPEG)
≤
≤
Copying to HDD
Instructions
–
≤
You can play DivX files
recorded with a computer onto
the USB memory (➡ 30).
You can play and copy to HDD
MP3 files recorded with a
computer onto the USB
memory (➡ 31, 52).
You can play and copy to HDD
or DVD-RAM still pictures
recorded with a computer onto
the USB memory (➡ 32, 50).
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
≥[EX88] If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this
unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
[Note]
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards you can use on this unit [EX88]
SD Memory Card§ (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 16 GB)
MultiMediaCard
Type
§
Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
Indicated in these
instructions by
[SD]
Data that can be recorded
and played
Still pictures (JPEG)
Video (SD Video)
Instructions
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§
A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 32, 50).
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 49)
≥SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.
Suitable SD cards
Structure of folders
¢¢¢: Numbers
≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display
the SDHC logo can be used.
XXX: Letters
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
Card
(This site is in English only.)
DCIM
These folders are
shown earlier in the
Album View screen
than other still picture
folders.
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary
for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a
PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases,
format the card on this unit (➡ 57, 84).
≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card
Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC
Memory Cards in FAT32 format.
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only
compatible with SD Memory Cards.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
≥This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD
card.
(Picture folder)
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
Any folder with JPEG files
e.g.,
001
P0000001.JPG
P0000001.JPG
(MPEG2 folder)
SD_VIDEO
PRGꢀꢀꢀ
≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
MOVꢀꢀꢀ.MOD
MOVꢀꢀꢀ.MOI
PRGꢀꢀꢀ.PGI
MGR_INFO
(MPEG2 information folder)
RQT9088
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
DivX
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
Playable
media
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
)
G
File
format
DivX
PE
≥Files must have the
extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”,
“.AVI” or “.avi”.
J
(
es
r
u
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
Number
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
ct
i
of folders (including the root folder)
p
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files
il
Number
of files
st
d
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Support
version
Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6)
with standard playback of DivX media files.
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
Video
≥Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
an
§4 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
iles
f
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
MP3
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on the
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
es,
l
i
f
vX
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
Structure of MP3 folders
[CD] [USB]
Di
g
MP3
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in
in
Root
d
r
the order you want to play
Playable
media
[HDD] [CD] [USB]
(folder=group)
001
a
them.
(file=track)
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
File
format
MP3
Reg
/
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
n
002 group
io
Number
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
003 group
at
of folders 300 folders (groups)
m
r
(groups)
(including the root folder)
o
f
001track.mp3
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1
3000 files (tracks)
:
Number
of files
(tracks)
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
in
d
r
Order of play
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
ca
Structures of still picture folders
[CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order
they were updated or
taken.
d
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
frequency
an
Root
y
r
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
ID3 tags
compatible ([HDD] [USB])
002 Folder
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
emo
Still pictures (JPEG§2
)
003 Folder
Playable
media
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB]
[SD]
USB
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
File
format
File format: JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
004 Folder
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Order of play
Number
of pixels
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
[RAM]
Number
of
[CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders recognizable:
300 folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
folders§3
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
§1 Still pictures on the root
folder can also be
Root
[CD] [USB] Maximum number of files recognizable§1
:
ꢁ1
Number
of files§3
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
displayed.
3000 files
JPEG
§2 Folders can be created
on other equipment.
However, these folders
cannot be selected as a
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file
name has been input
using other equipment,
the name may not be
displayed properly or you
may not be able to play or
edit the data.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
DCIMꢀꢀꢀ
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
MOTION
JPEG
not supported
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other types of files is 4000.
ꢁ2
DCIM
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG
RQT9088
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)
Disc and card care
Inserting discs
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
∫ How to hold a disc or card
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up with the
arrow facing in.
DO
DO NOT
Insert label-up.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Insert fully.
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Automatic drive select function
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to
“PROTECT” (➡ 56, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
DO
DO NOT
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
∫ Handling precautions
[Note]
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc
from the cartridge.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
≥[RAM] When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 56), play automatically starts when inserted in
the unit.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
DO NOT
shapes.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (➡ 30, 50).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
Inserting, removing the SD card [EX88]
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any
subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the
card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
Inserting the card
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
If you are using a
miniSD card or a
microSD card, insert
it into the adaptor
that comes with the
card.
e.g., miniSD
ADAPTER
Insert and remove
this adaptor from the
unit.
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
Press on the centre of the card.
Pull it straight out.
ꢀ
ꢁ
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card”
screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the
SD drive (➡ 30, 50).
RQT9088
≥If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts
Digital channel information
While stopped
2
REC
Press [STATUS ] to show the information
screen.
Programme name
Channel
3
dcats
oa
Station Name
DVD
TV
lbr
Progress of the current programme
Signal Quality (➡ below)
2
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
PAGE
CH
Current time
2 3
4 5 6
1
Group
Numbered
buttons
3
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Services
18:53
Change the
group (➡ 59).
ANALOGUE
CH
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
Encrypted
Change Favourite
8 9
7
ANALOGUE
CH
NOW
Multi Audio
info
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
PG
0
SELECT
louendgita
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
n
Programme is broadcast in multi-channel
sound (➡ 55, DVB Multi Audio)
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
hinga
The parental ratings level is displayed.
STATUS
tc
STATUS
a
I
During scrambled broadcasting
(Cannot be viewed with this unit.)
W
/
)
d
r
OK
Broadcast time
a
c
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
OK
D
S
/
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
y
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
Press [STATUS ] again (only when “info ” is displayed).
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Bemor
Signal Quality
US
No Signal:
The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
Select the channel
No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.
(Disc/
1 Turn on the television and select the
If “No Signal” is displayed:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
dling
a
[Note]
2 Press [ DVD] to turn the unit on.
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
diah
e
M
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
∫ If a software update is available, a notification is
displayed on the digital channel information
≥Digital channel
352 ABC2
No Signal
All Services
18:53
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
Encrypted
Change Favourite
Software update
REC
NOW
Multi Audio
Software update
PG
Press the “Red” button to launch software update screen.
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
∫ If New service message appears
15:
When a new DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
and all created groups are deleted. The timer recording
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Analogue channel
programmes are also cancelled.)
REC
.
New Service
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
A new DVB Service has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
the current Favourite settings
and all Timer Programmes.
1
2
Press [ANALOGUE CH].
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
e.g., 5:
15:
[0] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [5]
Yes
No
RETURN
OK
[Note] (Digital broadcast only)
The display/hide setting can be changed (➡ 63, New Service
Message).
≥This unit can receive Standard Definition (SD) broadcasts, but is
unable to receive High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
When High Definition (HD) programmes are broadcast, “Unable to
decode HD” is displayed in the digital channel information
(➡ right).
≥This unit can receive free cable television but it cannot receive paid
services.
RQT9088
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to “Advanced playback” (➡ 28) for detail
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
information.
[DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
2
[VCD]
REC
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
≥To return to the menu screen
ꢂ
3
[DVD-V]
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].
DVD
[VCD]
TV
Press [RETURN].
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
[Note]
1
PAGE
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when
you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television
screen and so on.
2 3
4 5 6
1
CH
Numbered
buttons
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
7
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫
3
STATUS
I
OK
3,4,2,1
OPTION
RETURN
OK
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
OPTION
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [VCD]
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
[CD]
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
Menu operation for other type of contents
≥DivX (➡ 30)
≥MP3 (➡ 31)
≥Still pictures (JPEG) (➡ 32)
≥Music on HDD (➡ 34)
≥Music CD (➡ 34)
[Note]
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” (➡ 64) may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording. You
will be able to playback by changing the “TV System” settings in
that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording, change back
the settings before the recording starts.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,
pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you
may not always be able to control play as described in these
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 64).
RQT9088
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording television programmes
Refer to “Important notes for recording” (
➡
20) and
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the
“Advanced recording” (
➡
21) for detail information.
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
≥Recording modes and approximate recording times (➡ 21)
2
s
REC
REC
Remaining time on
the disc
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (➡ 62).
me
a
∫
ogr
3 5
pr
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
on
DVD
i
TV
s
i
REC
v
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
le
AV
e
t
1
Numbered
buttons
PAGE
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
2 3
1
ng
CH
i
d
3
4 5 6
or
ANALOGUE
CH
8 9
0
c
7
ANALOGUE
CH
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
/Re
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
s
c
≥[HDD] [RAM] (Analogue broadcast only) When “Rec for High
Speed Copy” is set to “Off” (➡ 61), you can change the
audio being received by pressing [AUDIO] during recording.
(Does not affect the recording of audio.)
;
is
d
y
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
∫
STATUS
I
-onl
y
∫ To pause recording
pla
OK
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
ng
i
OPTION
RETURN
y
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
/Pla
AUD5IO
4
∫ To stop recording
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
ts
n
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
nte
o
c
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
o
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalise them (➡ 58).
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
de
i
v
d
e
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information
(➡ 15) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.
≥[USB] It is not possible to record on a USB memory.
≥[SD] It is not possible to record on a card.
d
r
o
c
e
Preparation
r
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
ing
≥Turn on this unit.
y
a
l
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
P
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
HDD or DVD drive.
time.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
2
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 18, 24) or while
using Flexible Recording (➡ 22).
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥Digital channel
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
REC
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Analogue channel
REC
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
1
2
Press [ANALOGUE CH].
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
e.g., 5:
15:
[0] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [5]
RQT9088
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer recording
Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (➡ 24–27) for
detail information.
1 Press [GUIDE].
TV Guide: Landscape
Tue 14.10.08 19:45
Wed 15.10.
All Types
All Services
1 ABC 1
DVD
Emmerdale
TV
DVD
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
News
News
PAGE
2 3
1
CH
News
4 5 6
ANALOGUE
-24 Hr
+24 Hr
Prog.Type
Favourite
8 9
7
CH
TIMER REC
Info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
RETURN
Page
0
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
future programme and press [OK].
STATUS
I
1:58 SP
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00
Recording
1
HDD
Name
Date
Start
Stop
17:00
Mode
DVD
HDD SP
OK
1
ARD 15. 10. WED 16:00
2, 3
All Services : ARD
OPTION
RETURN
Programme Name
Fliege-Die Talkshow
CREATE
DISPLAY
CHAPTER
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 24, right column, step 3).
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
3 Press [OK].
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 20).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
lmore girls
15:30
16:00
16:30
00
..
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Timer icon
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Abenteuer...
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
ꢀ
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
Press [ DVD] to turn the unit off.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
Preparation
[Note]
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (➡ 64), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 10, 14).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 65).
∫ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
Using the TV Guide system to make
timer recordings (Digital broadcast
only)
and press [OK].
2 Press [OK].
Confirmation screen appears.
3 Press [2] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV Guide
disappears.)
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
[Note]
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via
externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
This unit receives the programme information differently according to
where you live.
[Note]
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (➡ 25)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(➡ 25)
∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 25)
≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated.
≥TV Guide system of this unit does not support analogue
broadcasts.
Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually or with the G-CODE
system (➡ 24).
RQT9088
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting titles
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
DVD
TV
1
While stopped
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
AV
DRIVE SELECT
s
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
PAGE
2 3
1
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
CH
4 5 6
press [OK].
ANALOGUE
CH
ngitle
8 9
0
7
le
DELETE Navigator
Grouped Titles
G-Code
DELETE
INPUT
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
HDD
e
DELETE
¢
SELECT
SKIP
SLOW/SEARCH
,
10.10.
11.10.
2
ing/D
3
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STOP
d
r
o
c
e
STATUS
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Page 02/02
EXIT
I
OK
r
r
Next
OPTION
RETURN
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
OK
button to select “VIDEO”.
1
RETURN
Time
OPTION
RETURN
2, 3, 4, 5
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
CREATE
CHAPTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
REC
MANUAL SKIP
“Red”
and press [;].
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
To show other pages (Thumbnail Display only)
Press [, ] to show other pages.
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the
option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 38,
Preparation
step 4).
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 56, Setting the protection).
4 Press [OK].
∫ Available disc space after deleting
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
≥[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.
The title is deleted.
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Available
disc space
......
Last title
recorded
Title
Title
Deleting during play
1
While playing
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
Press [DELETE ¢].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Available disc space
increases after deleting
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
Last title Available disc
......
Title
Title
Title
recorded
space
Later recorded
titles
Deleted
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
......
This space become available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
RQT9088
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important notes for recording
Broadcast in multi-channel sound (Digital broadcast only):
Selecting Audio for
Recording
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in
multi channel broadcast [“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of
digital channel information display (➡ 15)].
Hello
Hola
Hallo
Select the audio that you want to
record in “DVB Multi Audio” in the
on-screen menu (
However, audio cannot be switched after recording.
➡
55).
Bilingual broadcasts (Analogue broadcast only):
[HDD] [RAM]
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 28, Changing audio during play)
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
(➡ 62, Bilingual Audio Selection)
M 1
However in the following cases, select whether to record the
main or secondary audio:
Hello
–Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 62,
M 2
M 1
Audio Mode for XP Recording)
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On” (The default setting is “On”.
➡ 61)
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
Hello
Hallo
If you record from external equipment
– Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”)
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)
The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect.
About the aspect
when recording a
programme
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” ➡ 61), the
programme will be recorded in the original aspect used when
recording started (including when recording started at a
commercial, etc.). If recorded with a different aspect, select the
correct aspect (“16:9” or “4:3”).
[+R] [+RW]
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
However, in the following cases, programme will be recorded in 4:3.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be
recorded in 4:3 aspect.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you want to
copy titles in high
speed mode from the
HDD to DVD-R, etc.
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 61)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings (➡ above)
are necessary before recording to the HDD.
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Record to the HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
HDD
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or 8 cm DVD-
When recording the
“One time only
recording”
RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (
➡
84) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
broadcasts
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD]
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are
deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (➡ 58).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them as a commercially sold DVD-
Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
/I
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
;
1
/
/
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE
H
RC
SEA
R
ENTE
V
OL
A
Y
DISPL
U
MEN
T
OP
RN
RETU
ON
MENU
OFF
Finalise
DC
I
N
9
V
OPEN
D
ROUN
A.SUR
E
A
T
REPE
MOD
OR
T
MONI
P
I
C
T
U
R
E
M
O
D
E
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➡ 58).
Recording to DVD-R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥It is not possible to record to both the HDD and the DVD drive simultaneously.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RQT9088
and +R DL
20
Advanced recording
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
g
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
Recording Mode
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
in
d
r
[EX78]
(250 GB)
[EX88]
(400 GB)
Single-
Double-
sided§1
(9.4 GB)
sided
co
+RW
(4.7 GB)
(4.7 GB)
re
ed
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
55 hours
89 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
c
n
a
v
SP (Standard
110 hours
221 hours
441 hours
178 hours
357 hours
712 hours
2 hours
4 hours
4 hours
8 hours
2 hours
4 hours
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
3 hours 35 min.
7 hours 10 min.
Ad
/
recording mode)
g
in
LP (Long
recording mode)
d
r
eco
EP (Extra long
8 hours
16 hours
8 hours
14 hours 20 min.
recording mode)§4 (331hours§2
)
(534hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(12 hours§2
)
(6 hours§2
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2
)
r
o
f
FR (Flexible
Recording
Mode)§4
441 hours
maximum
712 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
Approximately
9 hours with video
quality equivalent
to LP mode.
es
maximum
t
o
for one side
n
t
n
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.
a
t
r
o
p
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
m
I
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
[HDD]
≥You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
REC
When removing a recorded disc
When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Format
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the disc now ?
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
Yes
No
SELECT
∫ To finalise the disc
RETURN
OK
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 58), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 58) or
“Disc Name” (➡ 56) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents—Format” (➡ 57)
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT9088
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced recording
5
When you want to start recording
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
and press [OK].
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
≥Recording starts.
XP
SP
LP
EP
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
To exit the screen without recording
e.g., HDD
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
Press [RETURN].
HDD
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
Remaining
time of
recording
REC 0:59
1 DVB
ABC1
L R
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
[HDD]
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space.
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM]
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the first
60 minutes will fit on the disc and the
30 minute balance will not get
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.
To stop play
Press [∫].
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
1
2
Press [∫].
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Necessary space for recording
Preparation
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
and press [OK].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
To stop play
Press [∫].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
and press [OK].
To stop recording
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
After play stops
and press [OK].
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
Flexible Rec
Maximum recording time
Record in FR mode.
3
This is the maximum recording
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.
Set rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
To stop timer recording
After play stops
Start
Cancel
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
Press [∫].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
3
4
recording time.
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
[Note]
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
RQT9088
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying from a video cassette recorder
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.
REC
er
d
r
Preparation
This unit
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left).
Turn on the main unit.
eco
r
e
t
2
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R
S
VIDEO
DV IN
AV3 IN
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 64).
Yellow White Red
set
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording to
cas
DV cable
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)
o
e
S Video
cable§
d
Audio/Video
cable
start.
avi
The following screen appears.
Other video equipment
m
DV Auto Rec
o
r
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
f
g
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
in
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
y
p
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
Cancel
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§
SELECT
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
Co
RETURN
OK
/
VIDEO terminal.
g
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥When the screen is not displayed
in
d
r
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (➡ 62).
After performing step 1
1
2
3
4
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].
➡ Go to step 3 (➡below)
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 61) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 61) of the Setup menu.
eco
r
ced
n
a
v
About the aspect when recording a programme (➡ 20)
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”
Ad
[Note]
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
≥If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
Manual recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 20, Important notes for
recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 64).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic
recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
[Note]
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 54).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
1
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.
2 Start play on the other equipment.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left).
3
When you want to start recording
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 22), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
RQT9088
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
Manually programming timer
recordings
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
Preparation
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Programme” and press [OK].
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 14).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 65).
3 Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].
Using G-CODE system to make timer
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)
≥When “Name” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button to
change the group [e.g., TV, Radio, Edit Favourites screen
(➡ 59)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you
want to record.
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
G-CODE is a registered trademark of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The
G-CODE system is manufactured under
license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.
≥Date
[. Date:
;:
Daily timer:
;:
Current date up to one month later minus
one day
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You can
find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers and magazines.
l
l
l
l
SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
1 Press [G-Code].
1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the Direct Navigator
screen (➡ 29) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
G-Code
Record
Remain
TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 26, Relief Recording).
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 26)
ON!)OFF
the G-CODE number.
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].
(➡ 44, Entering text)
3 Press [OK].
1:58 SP
TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
HDD
Name
Date
Start
Stop
22:30
Mode
DVD
HDD SP
2A ARD 15. 10. WED 22:00
All Services : ARD
No. Name
01
Programme Name
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ right, step 3).
Timer icon
ꢀ
ARD
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [ DVD] to turn the unit off.
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
No. Name
01
Timer icon
ꢀ
ARD
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
TUE 14.10.08. 12:56:00
Drive
HDD
space
Mode
SP
Stop
20:00
DVD
Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 25).
HDD
OK
Programme
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [ DVD] to turn the unit off.
RQT9088
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
Check, change or delete a programme
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
1
While the unit is on
g
Press [PROG/CHECK].
in
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].
d
r
1:58 SP
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00
Recording
co
HDD
Stop DVD Mode
New Timer Programme
Drive
Stop Recording
No. Name
Date
Start
space
re
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
me
i
t
Cancel
Stop Recording
SELECT
ced
n
RETURN
OK
a
v
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
RETURN
Ad
Recording” and press [OK].
A Icons
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
F
[
Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the
programme with the later start time starts when the
earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
To release the unit from recording
standby
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because
the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➡ 26).
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
X
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.
≥The timer icon “F” (➡ right) disappears from the timer
recording list.
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (➡ right) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
B Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
OK:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the
remaining space.
Notes on timer recording
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display
will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 45).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
! :
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left.
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to
the HDD.
Relief:
C Channel name, programme name and other
information are displayed.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 24,
right column, step 3)
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].
Recorded
Recorded
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
[Note]
≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9088
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced timer recording
Auto Renewal Recording
Relief Recording
[HDD]
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 29).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
1:58 SP
TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00
Timer
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP DVD
Recording
HDD
DVD
RENEW
ON
Name
Date
SUN
Start
22:00
Stop
Mode
SP
2A ARD
22:30 HDD
All Services : ARD
Programme Name
[Note]
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
RQT9088
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ When the TV Guide displays “No information
available for analogue services” or the empty TV
Guide list
Operations in the TV Guide system
Basic operations
TV Guide: Landscape
Wed 15.10.
Tue 14.10.08 19:45
All Services
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait
view.
All Types
g
1 ABC 1
in
Emmerdale
d
r
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
Landscape view
TV Guide: Landscape
Wed 15.10.
Tue 14.10.08 19:45
All Services
The “empty” field
co
All Types
1 ABC 1
Emmerdale
re
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually or with the G-CODE system
(➡ 24).
me
i
t
News
News
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or group
ced
n
News
a
v
-24 Hr
+24 Hr
Prog.Type
Favourite
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or group (e.g. Free TV, Radio).
Ad
TIMER REC
Info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
RETURN
Page
1
From the desired programme type
Press the “Yellow” button to display
the list of programme type.
From the desired group
Portrait view
TV Guide: Portrait
Wed 15.10.
1 ABC 1
Tue 14.10.08 19:45
All Services
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of groups.
All Types
ABC 1
ABC 2
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
item.
All Types
All Types
Movie
All Services
All Services
Free TV
-24 Hr
+24 Hr
News
Radio
Prog.Type
Favourite
TIMER REC
RETURN
Entertainment
Sport
Favourite 1
Favourite 2
Page
Info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
3 Press [OK].
To change channels Landscape view
≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
Portrait view
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
e.g.,
TV Guide: Landscape
Wed 15.10.
Tue 14.10.08 19:45
All Services
To view a
programme list for
another day
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
All Types
Programme type, “News”
is selected in step 2 of
Landscape view.
1 ABC 1
Emmerdale
Time:
ABC 1
ABC 2
News
News
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
News
To browse through
the TV Guide list
Press [W X CH].
-24 Hr
+24 Hr
Prog.Type
Favourite
TIMER REC
Info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
To see programme
information
Press [STATUS
].
RETURN
Page
Additional information (programme name,
programme duration, broadcast time,
description) is available for these
programmes.
(Programmes with the
[Note]
symbol)
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic
areas. This function does not work properly unless the
information which distinguishes the programme type and
groups sent from broadcast stations is correct.
TV Guide
Tue 14.10.08 19:45
Wed 15.10.
Spending Other People’s Money
ABC ONE, Lifestyle
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
19:30-20:00. 30min.
A
flashy car salesman loses his cool when stingy friend
takes over his wallet. He’s lorced to sell his possessions
at car boot sale to pay for food.
a
programme.
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected
the programme type or groups
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Services” of the
groups in step 2 above.
TIMER REC
RETURN
Return to List
To return to the previous screen
Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Press [STATUS
programme list.
] again to return to the
RQT9088
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced playback
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
Skipping
the
Operation during play
≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
and press [OK].
specified
time(Time
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1
minute intervals. (Press and hold for 10-
minute intervals.)
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Slip)
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]
(This function
does not work
with finalised
discs.)
Stopped position
This automatically disappears after
approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen
again press [TIME SLIP] again.
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared in some cases.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX : The position is
cleared if the unit is turned off.
-
5 min
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [;].
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [] or [].
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search
forward.
[CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all levels
of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of
search.
Search
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts
approximately 1 minute later.
Manual
Skip
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]
(This function
does not work
with finalised
discs.)
During play or while paused, press
Skip
[] or [].
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to
play.
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [, ] to skip to the start of a
chapter.
Create
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX : Press [] to return to the beginning
of the title currently playing.
Chapter
(➡ 38, Title/
Chapter)
Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or
track.
Starting
from a
selected
title
[HDD] [RAM]
≥[HDD]
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
≥MP3 and JPEG
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD], DivX and analogue broadcast
LR>L>R
^---------------}
HDD
≥Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
PLAY
5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
L R
≥This works only when
e.g., “L R” is selected
stopped (the screen on the
right is displayed on the television) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while
stopped (the above screen is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play
time appears on the unit’s display.)
[DVD-V]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 54, Soundtrack).
1 ENG
CꢃDigital 3/2.1ch
Soundtrack
e.g., English is selected.
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Quick
[Note]
View
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 62).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting
is “On” ➡ 61).
[HDD] [RAM]
While paused, press [] or [].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is
continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).
Slow-
motion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused, press [2] (2;) or
Frame-by-
frame
[1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession
forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V]
RQT9088
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You can
also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All Titles
VIDEO
009
PICTURE
MUSIC
HDD
007
008
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
ARD 18.10. SAT
r
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
o
t
- - -
button to select “VIDEO”.
a
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
vig
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
OK
Select Previous
Next
OPTION
RETURN
Na
and press [OK].
t
(in Thumbnail Display)
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles
screen only).
irec
e.g., [HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
To sort the titles for easy searching
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)
—D
y
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
a
l
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
p
o
t
To show other pages
les)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].
(Thumbnail Display only)
it
t
≥You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
mes(
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
am
r
g
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to another
Direct Navigator screen, the sort will be cancelled.
Direct Navigator screen icons
o
r
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
p
To play grouped titles [HDD]
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].
ed
d
r
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].
eco
t
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
r
g
n
i
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
t
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 26, Relief Recording)
lec
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
Title with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 84,
CPRM)
/S
k
c
a
≥Press [;] to cancel.
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
b
y
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press
a
l
Create Group
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
p
Release Grouping
([HDD] only)
[OK].
d
e
c
Title recorded using a different encoding system
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
n
a
v
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
d
A
(➡ 64).
Release Grouping:
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].
≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group
are released.
≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from
the group.
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”
∫ Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
1 While the Direct Navigator screen is displayed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
Press [OPTION].
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
VIDEO
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
e.g.,
10.10.
Chantal Show
11.10.
Dolphines
2
ARD 11.10. SAT
Dolphines
ARD 18.10. SAT
Dolphines
Table Display
“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”
All Titles
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
Page 01/01
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]
OK
OK
Select
Next
OPTION
OPTION
PICTURE/MUSIC
RETURN
RETURN
To change the group name
Grouped Titles screen
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK].
Enter the name. (➡ 44, Entering text)
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode
are bundled and displayed as one item.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
HDD
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
10.10.
Chantal Show
11.10.
Dolphines
2
Previous
Next
Select Previous
Page 02/02
OK
RETURN
Next
OPTION
(in Thumbnail Display)
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
and press [OK] to display the
RQT9088
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
Playing DivX video contents
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Showing the menu screen
[CD]
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
1
2
Insert the disc.
If the disc contains different file types
1 Show DivX Menu screen.
Playback
(➡ left, Showing the menu screen)
Play Mode:DivX
Select file type.
Folder1
:
00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
No.
001
Name of Title
Tree
DivX
JPEG
MP3
ABC.avi
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
Otherwise,
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Page
001/001
Total Title : 001
OK
RETURN
≥Files are treated as titles.
[USB] [SD]
1 Insert the USB memory or the SD card.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
USB device
SD Card
press [OK].
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play starts on the selected title.
Play Video (DivX)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
SELECT
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Copy Music (MP3)
RETURN
OK
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
To stop playing
Press [∫].
RETURN
OK
2
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
To show other pages
Press [, ].
∫ Changing the file type to play
[CD] [USB]
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
1 Press [RETURN] several times to exit the menu.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
[Note]
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
FUNCTION MENU
CD(DivX/JPEG/MP3)
Play Mode : DivX
Playback
≥Successive play is not possible.
Recording
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive
or the DVD drive.
Copy
To Others
OK
Using the tree screen to find a folder
RETURN
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
3 [CD]
Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press
[OK].
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
[USB]
Folder
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
F
1/21
1Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press
12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
[OK].
2Press [3, 4] to select “USB device” and
press [OK].
You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.
DATA2
4 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT9088
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regarding DivX VOD content
Using the tree screen to find a group
1 While the file list is displayed
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
ures
ct
i
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 65, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
MP3 Menu
Tree
p
CD
MP3 music
G
8
G
7/25
il
T
14
001 My favorite
DivX Registration
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
Setup
TOTAL
40/111
DivX (R) Video On Demand
Number
You cannot select
groups that contain no
compatible files.
andst
0
–
9
Tuning
8 alphanumeric characters
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
3
P
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
SELECT
OK
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
,M
RETURN
Connection
Others
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[OK].
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
The file list for the group appears.
ngDivX
y
a
l
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
P
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
– you press [ DVD].
– you press [∫].
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– you press [] or [, ] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
– timer recording starts on the HDD.
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
Playing MP3 files
[CD] [USB]
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/
CD-RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or
copying.
1 Show MP3 Menu screen.
(➡ 30, Showing the menu screen)
Selected group
No.
Group
My favorite
MP3 Menu
CD
1
Total
1
:
G: Group No.
G
1
Track
Tree
T
1
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL:
001 Both Ends Freezing
TOTAL
2
3
4
5
6
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint It Yellow
006 Pyjamamama
007 Shrimps from Mars
008 Starperson
1/111
Track No./Total tracks in
all groups
Number
0
–
9
Prev.
Next
7
8
SELECT
9
10
009 Velvet Cuppermine
010 Ziggy Starfish
OK
RETURN
Page 001/024
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [, ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9088
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
∫ Regarding Album View screen
Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are grouped
by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (➡ 42).
Playing still pictures
[HDD] [RAM]
Grouped by date
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB] [SD]
002
≥You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/
CD-RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, removing the SD card [EX88] (➡ 14)
Total 68
Date: 10.10. 2007
1 Show Album View screen.
Number of pictures/Shooting date
[CD] [USB] [SD]
(➡ 30, Showing the menu screen)
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB] [SD]
Album
[HDD] [RAM]
002
While stopped
1
2
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”
button to select “PICTURE”.
10.10. 07
Zoological park
Total 24
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
Album View screen
MUSIC
VIDEO
- - -
PICTURE
≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC
etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
001
002
Regarding Album View
screen ➡ right
Total
Date: 1. 1.2006
5
Total
Date: 1. 2.2006
3
- - -
- - -
- - -
Page 01/01
OPTION
Previous
Next
OK
Press OK to show
pictures.
Slide Show
RETURN
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [OK].
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
PICTURE
e.g., HDD
Album Name 103__DVD
0001
0005
0009
0002
0006
----
0003
0007
----
0004
0008
----
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
OK
Slide Show
OPTION
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 33)
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9088
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful functions during still picture play
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
Start Slide
Show
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
ures
Slide Show
Setting
ct
i
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
p
Start Slide Show
il
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].
Slide Show Setting
≥To change the display interval
andst
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].
3
P
,M
≥Repeat Play
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
ngDivX
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
Rotate
y
a
l
Rotate RIGHT
P
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
–[CD] [USB] Still pictures
Rotate LEFT
OK
RETURN
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
–When changing date
≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation information may not
be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
Zoom in
Zoom out
Rotate RIGHT
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
Rotate LEFT
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK].
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
Zoom in
OK
RETURN
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.
While playing
e.g., HDD
Properties
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Press [STATUS
] twice.
Date
1. 1. 2005
No.
3 / 9
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
Shooting date
RQT9088
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing music
4 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
To play music CD
press [OK].
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
CD
e.g.,
1 Insert a music CD.
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
The menu is automatically displayed.
MP3
CD
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Play Music
Copy Music
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
SELECT
RETURN
OK
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
and press [OK].
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (➡ 52)
and searches for the title information.
[Note]
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while
the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To
return to the previous screen, press [OK].
P O W E R E D B Y
Useful functions during music play
Operations during play
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
≥The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
press [OK].
Press [;].
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
Pause
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
Press [] or [].
Search
15: [1] ➡ [5]
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
During play or while paused, press [] or
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback continues.
Skip
[].
Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
To play music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD (➡ 52)
You can select the item which you want to repeat.
Repeat
Play
While playing
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive
[HDD]
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”
and press [OK].
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
3
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
≥Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
You can change the order of the Album View (CD)/
Group View (MP3) alphabetically.
Sort
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play CD on
[HDD]
While Album View (CD) screen or Group View
(MP3) screen is displayed
HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and
press [OK].
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” or
“Group Name” and press [OK].
Play Music
Please select music to play.
Play CD on HDD
Play MP3 on HDD
SELECT
To cancel the sorted screen
Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].
RETURN
OK
While Track View (CD) screen or Track View (MP3)
screen is displayed
Properties
[HDD] [CD]
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album/
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press
[OK].
group and press [OK].
You can also select the album/group with the numbered
buttons.
e.g.,
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
RQT9088
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenient functions
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
FUNCTION MENU window
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
ons
i
t
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
unc
FUNCTION MENU
1 Turn on the television and select the
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
ntf
e
i
Playback
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Recording
n
e
v
Delete
Copy
n
o
To Others
OK
2 Turn on this unit and press [W X CH]
C
/
RETURN
c
i
to select the channel.
s
u
3
When you want to pause the TV programme
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
Press [;].
press [OK].
ingm
y
HDD
ꢄ
≥If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[OK].
ARD
Pla
L
R
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Timer Recording
G-Code Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can
To Others
OK
turn off this icon (➡ 63, Pause Live TV Icon).
HDD Management
RETURN
4
When you want to resume
≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous
Press [1] (PLAY)
screen.
≥The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode
(➡ 21) regardless of the recording mode and the drive
selected before starting saving.
Playback
You can select and play recorded
programmes (➡ 16, 29), change the Play
Mode (DivX, JPEG, MP3) (➡ 30), etc.
≥At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be
temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on
the HDD free space.)
Recording
You can easily find programmes you want
to watch and set them for timer recording
(➡ 18).
Operation during Pause Live TV
Press [, ].
Search
Pause
Delete
You can delete items using DELETE
Navigator (➡ 19, 43).
Press [;].
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
Copy
You can copy recorded titles using COPY
Navigator (➡ 46).
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
≥Press again to return to the normal speed.
Quick View
Timer Recording
G-Code Record
Advanced Copy
[EX88]
You can start programming timer
recording (➡ 24).
While paused, press [] or
Slow-
motion
[].
You can make timer recording setting by
entering G-CODE numbers (➡ 24).
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
You can make a copy list and then copy
(➡ 47).
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
Stop Pause
Live TV
You can copy the new still pictures on an
Copy New Pictures SD card (➡ 50).
[Note]
Playlists
You can create playlists by grouping your
favourite chapters (➡ 40).
≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer
recording starts.
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work if the clock is not set.
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work
–while recording
Flexible Rec
The unit sets the best possible picture
quality that fits the recording within the
remaining disc space (➡ 22).
–while timer recording, etc.
DV Auto Rec
Setup
DV automatic recording function (➡ 23)
≥You cannot change audio or subtitle during resume play.
≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is
full or the saving lasts 8 hours.
≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after
started.
You can change the unit’s settings using
Setup menu (➡ 59).
HDD Management
DVD Management
You can manage the HDD, discs and
cards through formatting, finalising and
other operations (➡ 56).
[EX88]
Card Management
Copy Music CD
You can copy music CD to the HDD
(➡ 52).
USB device
This unit displays the menu to help you
start USB operations (➡ 30).
≥“USB device” appears when a
compatible USB device is connected.
RQT9088
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control”.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.
“HDAVI Control 3” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation
1
2
3
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable (➡ 8) or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (➡ 69).
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 64). (The default setting is “On”.)
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be used as “HDAVI Control”.
4
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control”
function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV
Download from the TV
to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as
on the TV (➡ 9).
(When the TV is on)
Easy playback
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to
HDMI input mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK],
[G-Code] etc.
(When the TV is off)
Power on link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK],
[G-Code] etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is
automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback
or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Power off link
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when
recording, copying, finalising etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,
the receiver will also turn off.
§1 This button is available only when this unit is on.
§2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [] or [] to go back to where playback started.
[Note]
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT9088
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more
convenient functions.
”)
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.
TM
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.
l
o
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.
≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote control other than those listed above.
≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.
r
t
Con
I
V
A
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Using the FUNCTION
FUNCTION MENU
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window
MENU window to
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
D
using the TV remote control.
Playback
H
“
operate this unit
Recording
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
Delete
Copy
≥This function is available with the
TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV
remote control, and press [OK].
To Others
OK
RETURN
IERALink
About the FUNCTION MENU
window (➡ 35).
T(V
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD.
This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be
deleted.
Pause live TV
programme
withe
≥This function is available with the
TV which has “HDAVI Control 3”
function.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
tions
a
r
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
≥This unit turns on automatically.
ope
d
e
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (➡ below) and press [OK].
≥The TV programme resumes.
Link
To stop Pause Live TV
Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.
Refer to “Note” on page 35, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (➡ below) and display the
Using the OPTION
menu window to
operate this unit
Top Menu for DVD-Video.
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
(➡ below).
e,g.,
≥This function is available with the
TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
FUNCTION
MENU
FUNCTION MENU window is
displayed (➡ above).
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
Top Menu
[DVD-V]
Top menu is displayed (➡ 16).
Menu
Drive Select
Menu [DVD-V]
Menu is displayed (➡ 16).
OK
RETURN
Drive Select
Select the HDD, DVD or SD
drive
[Note]
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-
Video is copying.
Rotate RIGHT
(JPEG)
Rotate the still picture (➡ 33).
Rotate LEFT
(JPEG)
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Zoom in (JPEG) Enlarge or shrink the still
picture (➡ 33).
Zoom out
(JPEG)
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote
control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).
Using the Control
Panel
The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:
Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.
Control Panel
Pause
Exit
Search
≥While playing still pictures
Search
Play
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit
the screen.
Stop
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [ DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
RQT9088
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
37
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➡ 64).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing titles/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
1
During play or while stopped
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalized discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, Press the “Red”
Title/Chapter
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.
button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
Title View screen
MUSIC
VIDEO
PICTURE
Chapter
008
ARD 10.10.
ARD 11.10.
Start
End
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter. (➡ 28, 39,
Create Chapter)
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
OK
Select Previous
Next
OPTION
RETURN
Title
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
≥You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
playlist (➡ 40).
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
–Titles: 499
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
–Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
3 Press [OPTION].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
[Note]
Enter Name
Set up Protection
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Title
Partial Delete
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Delete
Properties
Edit
operations”
(➡ 39).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
Create Group
Release Grouping
Chapter View
Table Display
All Titles
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (➡ 29)
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance (➡ 29)
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
PICTURE/MUSIC
≥Playing still pictures (➡ 32)
≥To play music recorded on HDD
(➡ 34)
Preparation
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
chapter.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 56, Setting the protection).
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 6.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
HDD
Chapter View screen
VIDEO
008 ARD 11.10.
0:31.24
---
---
≥To show other--p- ages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 39).
Combine Chapters
Title View
≥You can go back to Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9088
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 38)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (➡ 19).
s
r
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
e
t
ap
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
Properties
Properties
Dinosaur
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
es/ch
l
t
i
No.
026
Time
12:19
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Name ARD
t
g
in
You can give names to recorded titles.
Enter Name
it
(➡ 44, Entering text)
d
E
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.
Set up Protection§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Tit
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Cancel Protection§
007
008
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
Partial Delete
VIDEO
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Start
End
(➡ below, For your reference)
Next
Finish
0:43.21
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
Change Thumbnail
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
VIDEO
HDD
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
ꢄ
008
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
Change
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
(➡ below, For your reference)
Finish
thumbnail is shown.
0:00.00
To change the thumbnail
Start play and select the image
Change
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at
the point you want to change.
of a thumbnail.
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
You can divide a title into two.
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Divide Title
VIDEO
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
Preview
Divide
(➡ below, For your reference)
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
Finish
To confirm the division point
0:43.21
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the
title.
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 84) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–6 (➡ 38)
Delete Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
[HDD] [RAM]
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
Create Chapter
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
VIDEO
HDD
title.
[HDD] [RAM]
008
PLAY
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
(➡ below, For your reference)
Create
Finish
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
0:43.21
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].
Combine Chapters
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use Search (➡ 28), Time Slip (➡ 28) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 28) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 28).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [] (start) or [] (end).
RQT9088
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating, editing and playing playlists
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
You can arrange the chapters (➡ 38) to create a playlist.
press [OK].
Title
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
- -
Playlist View
- -
- -
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
Create
- -
- -
- -
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title
Copying (➡ 45) a playlist will create a title.
and press [4].
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles
and source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to
step 7.
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
–Playlists: 99
–Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
---
OK
OPTION
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
Creating playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 56, Setting the protection).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 64).
[OK].
Press [3] to cancel.
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
---
OK
OPTION
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]
(➡ 39, Create Chapter).
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
FUNCTION MENU
002
002
---
---
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Timer Recording
G-Code Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Playback
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
Recording
Delete
Copy
Chapters in Playlist
---
---
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
To Others
OK
OK
Press RETURN to finish.
RETURN
HDD Management
RETURN
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8 Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9088
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playlist operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
1
While stopped
ts
[HDD] [RAM]
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
lis
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
y
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
Properties
and press [OK].
is shown.
ingpla
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
y
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
Properties
press [OK].
Dinosaur
ndpla
No.
10
Date 12.10.2006 TUE
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53
a
g
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
RETURN
OK
n
i
playlist.
it
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
d
(➡ 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)
To edit ➡ Step 5.
Create
[HDD] [RAM]
Playlists
HDD
01
Playlist View
- -
Playlist View screen
ing,e
t
a
e
- -
Copy§
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[OK].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
12.10. SUN 0:30
- -
Create
- -
[HDD] [RAM]
Cr
- -
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 38)
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
You can give names to playlists.
(➡ 44, Entering text)
Enter
Name
[HDD] [RAM]
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
(➡ 39, Change Thumbnail)
Change
Create
Thumbnail
Copy
[HDD] [RAM]
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
Enter Name
Delete
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Change Thumbnail
Properties
Edit
Chapter operations
Chapter View
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
(➡ 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)
Add
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Chapter
chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [OK].
Move
Chapter
Playlists
HDD
Chapter View
Chapter View screen
Playlists
HDD
Move Chapter
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
002
001
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:10.24
0:19.36
0:10.24
0:19.36
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
≥To show -o-- ther pages/Multiple editing (➡ 38)
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
OK
RETURN
(➡ 39, Create Chapter)
Create
Add Chapter
Chapter
Move Chapter
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Create Chapter
(➡ 39, Combine Chapters)
Combine
Chapters
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
(➡ 39, Delete Chapter)
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
Delete
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
Chapter§
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
§
Multiple editing is possible.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9088
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing still pictures and music
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
Album (still picture) and picture
operation
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
Delete
Picture§
Delete
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW and USB
memory.
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make
certain before proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, files other than
the still picture files inside the album will
also be deleted. (This does not apply to
folders under the album concerned.)
Album§
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 56, Setting the protection).
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
You can change the date of the picture.
1Press [2, 1] to select the item
and press [3, 4] to change.
2Press [OK].
Change
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
Date§
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
[HDD] [RAM]
2
Editing an album:
Select the album to be edited and
press [OPTION].
You can give names to albums.
(➡ 44, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not
be displayed on other equipment.
EnterAlbum
Name
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
press [OPTION] without selecting album.
Editing a still picture:
If set, this will
Set up
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Pic
protect the still
picture or album
from accidental
deletion.
1Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [OK].
2Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
Protection§
Cancel
103__
Album Name
0001
0002
Protection§
Press [2, 1]
0005
0006
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
The lock symbol appears when the still
picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this
unit to protect an album, the album may be
deleted by another unit.
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is
shown.
Properties
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
[HDD] [RAM] [CD]
[USB] [SD]
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [OK].
You cannot copy if multiple albums are
selected.
Copy to
∫ To edit the album
DVD-RAM
(e.g., [HDD])
[HDD]
Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 33)
Copy to
Start Slide Show
HDD
Slide Show Setting
[RAM]
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
Delete Album
Change Date
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start”
or “Yes” and press [OK].
Add
Pictures
Create
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select
the album that contains the
still picture you want to add
and press [OK].
Copy to DVD-RAM
Album
VIDEO/MUSIC
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
3Press [3, 4] to select the item
Album (still picture) and picture operation
(➡ right)
and press [OK].
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:
Select the still picture you want to add
and press [OK].
∫ To edit still picture
(e.g., [HDD])
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:
All the still pictures in the album will be
copied.
Delete Picture
Properties
Album (still picture) and picture
operation (➡ right)
4Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
Change Date
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
or “No” and press [OK].
≥If you want to continue copying, select
“Yes” and go to step ➁.
You can go back to Album View.
Album View
Only for “Create Album”
5Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
or “No” and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
≥If “Yes” is selected:
Press [RETURN].
You can give names to albums. (➡ 44,
Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The album name is automatically given.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
§
Multiple editing is possible.
[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,
“Copy to DVD-RAM”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create
Album”.
RQT9088
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing music
[HDD]
Deleting still pictures and music using
DELETE Navigator
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
c
i
s
u
1
While stopped
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
dm
n
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
a
s
e
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play CD on
press [OK].
HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and
press [OK].
ur
t
3
[HDD] [RAM]
lpic
Press the colour button to select
“PICTURE” or “MUSIC”.
3
Editing an album/group
i
t
Press [3, 4] to select the album/
group and press [OPTION].
[HDD] If you pressed the “Yellow” button, press [3, 4] to
select “Delete CD on HDD” or “Delete MP3 on HDD” and
press [OK].
ings
t
i
Editing a track
Ed
4
Deleting an album (still picture), album (CD) or group
1Press [3, 4] to select the album/group and
press [OK].
(PMrPe3)ss [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [DELETE ¢].
2Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[OPTION].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
Deleting a still picture or track (MP3)
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or
group which contains the still picture or
track to delete and press [OK].
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture or track and press [OK].
and press [OK].
∫ To edit the album (CD)/group (MP3)
e.g., Album View (CD)
Delete Album
Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3)
operation (➡ below)
Enter Album Name
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
option menu.
Repeat Play Setting
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 42,
step 3).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)
View” (➡ 42, step 3).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View (CD)”
(➡ left, step 4).
Useful functions during music play (➡ 34)
Track View
Sort
≥Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to
play—Direct Navigator (➡ 29)
≥Playing still pictures (➡ 32)
VIDEO/PICTURE
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View (MP3)”
(➡ left, step 4).
➡ below
∫ To edit the track (CD/MP3)
e.g., Track View (MP3)
To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still
picture only]
Press [, ] to show other pages.
Delete Track
Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3)
Properties
Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture
only]
operation (➡ below)
Enter Track Name
Enter Artist Name
Repeat Play Setting
Group View
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
You can go back to Album View (CD)/Group
View (MP3)
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
Useful functions during music play (➡ 34)
The item is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/
MP3) operation
[Note]
You cannot delete a track (CD) individually.
After performing step 1-4 (➡ above)
Delete Album (CD)
Delete Group (MP3)
Delete Track (MP3)
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded
contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before
proceeding.
Enter Album Name (CD) You can give names to albums/groups
Enter Group Name
(MP3)
Enter Track Name (CD/
MP3)
and tracks.
(➡ 44, Entering text)
Enter Artist Name (CD/
MP3)
You can edit the artist name of the
track.
(➡ 44, Entering text)
RQT9088
[Note]
≥Timer recordings do not start while editing music.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering text
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[SD]
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
≥To delete a character
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
[HDD] [RAM]
Characters
64 (44§)
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
Title
e.g., entering the letter “R”
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
Playlist
64
5
J
K
N
Q
L
O
R
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
Album of still pictures
Album (CD) ([HDD])
Group (MP3) ([HDD])
Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])
Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])
Disc ([RAM])
36
3 Press [OK].
7
7
6 M
40
≥To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢] and press
[OK].
7
40
P
7
40
3 Press [∫] (Set).
40
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.
64
§Title name for timer recording
To end partway
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.
Title
Disc
44
40
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (➡ 58). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.
[SD]
Characters
36
Album of still pictures
Broadcast
Characters
14
Enter Name
Chapter 1_
Favourite group 1–4
_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
ꢅ
/
9
ꢆ
ꢇ
$
0
Top Menu Preview
Chapter 1
[Note]
*
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
%
i
7
&
1 Show Enter Name screen.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 24, right
column.
Title
Select “Enter Name” in step 4 on page 38.
Playlist
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 41.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 56.
Album (CD) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 43.
Group (MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Group Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 43.
Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Track Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 43.
Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Artist Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 43.
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 3, “Editing still pictures
(JPEG)” on page 42.
Favourite group 1–4
Press the “Red” button in step 2 of the right column on
page 59, “To change the name of a group in the “Favourite”
column”.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Enter Name
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
ꢅ
/
9
ꢆ
ꢇ
$
0
Top Menu Preview
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
7
ꢈ
[
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
ꢉ
]
ꢄ
ꢊ
Delete
Set
m
n
o
M
P
T
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
ꢆꢆ
0
9
^
`
SELECT
Space
RQT9088
RETURN
OK
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
Copy
Advanced Copy
Features
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.
settings.
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
way you want.
ts
Copy direction
HDD ➝ DVD
DVD ➝ HDD
≤
–
≤
≤
lis
y
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
pla
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
High speed mode copy§1
≤
≤
or
s
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.
e
l
§2
Changing recording mode
Finalise§3
–
≤
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
ngit
i
Automatically finalised
Can be selected
y
High speed mode
–
Normal speed mode
–
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
–
Copying SD Video from an SD card
≤
/Cop
t
([EX88]) (➡ 49)
[HDD] [RAM] only
x
Copying playlists§4
–
≤
≤
–
–
≤
≤
≤
§5
§5
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
–
–
–
–
ngte
i
r
§6
§7
§6
≤
≤
§8
te
–
–
n
E
§1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 61).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥
When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.
≥[EX88] Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
)
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (➡ 58).
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD card ([EX88]).]
– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 20).
– Still pictures or music cannot be played.
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
HDD
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
12X Speed
4X Speed
4X Speed
DVD-RW§3
8X Speed
+R§4
4X Speed
+R DL§2
4X Speed
+RW
DVD-R§1
DVD-R DL§2
Recording
Mode
XP
SP
LP
EP (6H)
EP (8H)
Recorded
Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed
time
12 min.
6 min.
3 min.
2 min.
1 min. 30 s.
time
5 min. 46 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 21 s.
58 s.
time
time
time
time
time
1 hour
5x
10x
24x
44x
62x
75x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 53 s.
4x
8x
16x
24x
32x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 57 s.
4x
8x
16x
24x
31x
8 min. 20 s.
3 min. 45 s.
1 min. 53 s.
7x
16x
32x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
4x
8x
16x
15 min.
7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
4x
8x
16x
10x
20x
30x
40x
1
48 s.
≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 84) compatible DVD-
RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 39).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”
titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.
–
When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be
copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.
RQT9088
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 10)
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
Before copying
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 62) when:
–Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
–When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 62)
and you are copying in XP mode.
5
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-
only and you can no longer record or edit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Copy starts.
To return to the previous screen
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
Press [RETURN].
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following
∫ To stop copying (➡ 47)
table.
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 61)
Copy speed
functions (➡ 48)
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §
High speed
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
Normal speed
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[OPTION].
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
COPY Navigator
HDD
All Titles
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
Total
:
0
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
§
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” do not match.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
Properties
Page 01/01
Sort
OK
Grouped Titles
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.
[Note]
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot
be copied.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 10).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
[Note]
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 47).
Copy
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalised (➡ 84). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,
copy will not be performed.)
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
COPY Navigator
HDD
All Titles
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title
Total
:
0
001
002
003
004
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
Rec time
0:52(SP)
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
---
Page 01/01
OK
Select
OPTION
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
To show other pages
Press [, ] to show other pages.
4 Press [OK].
RQT9088
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,
the check mark is cancelled.
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
ts
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
” can be registered.
” or
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
lis
“
y
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
registered.
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
” can be
pla
See also “Before copying” (➡ 46).
or
s
5 Press [OK].
1
While stopped
e
l
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 48)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (➡ 48)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).
ngit
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
y
6 Press [2] to confirm.
and press [OK].
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Cop
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
DVD
1 Copy Direction
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 61).
HDD ꢀꢁDVD
Destination
Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
2
0
Create List
3
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
press [OK] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or
“Copy Only” and press [OK].
≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
4 Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD”, or vice versa. (➡ Go to step 6)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
∫ To stop copying
5 Set the recording mode.
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (➡ step 6).
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time
only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied
at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain
on the HDD.
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the
point canceled are copied.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
( 0%)
0MB
Size:
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
HDD ꢀꢁDVD
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Copy Mode
VIDEO High Speed
2
Create List
3
Page 01/01
∫ To return to the previous screen
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
Press [RETURN].
OPTION
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
Create List
HDD
All Titles
VIDEO Playlists
- - -
007
008
0:30(XP)
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
[Note]
ARD 10.10. FRI
- - -
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
- - -
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
Previous
Page 02/02
Select
Next
OK
OPTION
Previous
Next
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
RQT9088
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying titles or playlists
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
+R DL
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 61) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 61) of the Setup menu.
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
[+R]DL]
performed.
is displayed, but copy cannot be
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 20, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. (➡ 20, When
recording the “One time only recording”
broadcasts)
≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (➡ 14).
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Video”) (➡ 47, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
1 Set “Copy Time”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 2).
∫ Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
Data size of each registered item
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Size:
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
Size:
0MB (0%)
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
≥When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.
1 Copy Direction
DVD ꢀꢁHDD
2
Hour
00 Min.
Copy Mode
2
3
DVD-Video XP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
∫ To edit the copying list
Delete All
Copy Time
Select the item in step 6–5 (➡ 47)
1 Press [OPTION].
Press OK to change the setting.
Start Copying
OK
Add
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
RETURN
Delete
[OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press
[3, 4] to set the recording time.
Move
Delete All:
6 Press [OK].
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
2
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Delete:
Copying” and press [OK].
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➡ 58).
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 47)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
RQT9088
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
When the top menu is displayed
Copying SD Video from a video
equipment [EX88]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be
copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
ts
My favorite
01/02
lis
y
01
02
Chapter
1
Chapter
2
03
04
pla
Chapter
3
Chapter
4
05
06
or
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
s
e
l
VIDEO§
SD Video
ngit
y
REC
HDD
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
DVD-RAM
Cop
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
[Note]
≥The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
§DVD Video Recording format
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start
of copy to the end.
Preparation
1
2
3
Turn on both this unit and the camera.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 47, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
Connect the camera to this unit.
Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for
data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
The display below automatically appears when you connect the
camera to this unit.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 47.
Copying SD Video from an SD card
[EX88]
USB device
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
≥This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an SD
card.
Play Video (DivX)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
Copy Music (MP3)
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
RETURN
OK
≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the
copy list.
≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video (MPEG2)”
is not displayed.
SD Video
VIDEO§
HDD
DVD-RAM
§
DVD Video Recording format
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 47.
SD Card
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
RETURN
OK
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 47)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.
Copy Direction:
Source:SD CARD
Copy Mode:
Format:VIDEO
≥SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the
copy list.
≥If there are no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video (MPEG2)”
is not displayed.
RQT9088
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying still pictures
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [USB] [SD]
Copy New Pictures
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only
compatible with SD Memory Cards.
Copy from
Copy to
SD CARD
HDD
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to CD-R/CD-RW.
≥Still pictures copied from USB memories or SD cards are grouped
by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures
[USB] > [HDD] or [RAM]
and press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
1
While stopped
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Insert the USB memory (➡ 14).
The menu is automatically displayed.
[Note]
USB device
≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30
SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.
Play Video (DivX)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
Copy Music (MP3)
Update CD database on HDD
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 13), copying will
stop partway through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
SELECT
RETURN
OK
Copying using the copying list
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
(JPEG)” and press [OK].
Copy All Pictures
1
While stopped
Copy from
Copy to
USB
HDD
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
and press [OK].
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
Copy” and press [OK].
and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Source
SD CARD
HDD
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD
Destination
Copy Mode
2
PICTURE High Speed
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
0
Create List
3
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
[Note]
≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
4 Set the copy direction.
at the copy destination.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 13), copying will
stop partway through.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures [EX88]
[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]
5 Set the copy mode.
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still
pictures will be imported.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
1
While stopped
Insert the SD card. (➡ 14).
The menu is automatically displayed.
SD Card
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
RETURN
OK
RQT9088
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Note]
6 Register still pictures for copy.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 13), copying will
stop partway through.
list.
ures
Copy
ct
i
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
p
Picture
Picture/Folder
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD
il
To show other pages
Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [, ] to show other pages.
Create List
3
ingst
Page 01/01
y
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
OPTION
RETURN
∫ To edit the copying list
Cop
∫ To register individual still pictures
Select the item in step 6–4 (for a still picture) or 6–6
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[;].
Delete All
(for a folder) (➡ left)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Add
Delete
[OK].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
≥To show other pages (➡ right)
≥To select another folder (➡ right)
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press
[;].
4 Press [OK].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥To edit the copying list (➡ right)
5 Press [2] to confirm.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
2
Delete:
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
Copy
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 50, Copying using the copying list)
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Picture
Picture/Folder
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD
Copy Mode
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
∫ To select another folder
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
After performing steps 6–2 (➡ left, To register individual still
pictures)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
≥To show other pages (➡ right)
6 Press [OK].
Create List
SD CARD
Create List
SD CARD
Picture (JPEG)
Folder
≥To edit the copying list (➡ right)
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Folder
103__DVD
\DCIM\100__DVD
0001
----
----
0002
----
----
0003
----
0004
----
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---
---
---
---
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
----
----
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
Page 001/001
Previous
Next
Copying” and press [OK].
OK
OK
RETURN
≥Only when copying individual still pictures from [HDD] [RAM]
RETURN
to [SD]
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Folder
New folder
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
---
New folder
---
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT9088
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying music to HDD
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
[Note]
≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
Music CD (CD-DA)
recordings will not proceed.
When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB
memory or SD card.
≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
MP3
You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory.
Copying music from a USB memory
[USB] > [HDD]
About the Gracenote® Database
You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory devices to the
HDD by file or folder.
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve
CD title information.
≥One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.
≥The maximum number of groups on HDD: 300
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of groups that
can be recorded will be reduced.
When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will
automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted
CD.
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the
newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal
database. This unit has an internal database containing information
for approximately 350,000 album titles.
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory (➡ 14).
You can update the internal database (➡ 53).
The menu is automatically displayed.
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect
title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found,
then track name, album name and artist name will be blank.
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
USB device
Play Video (DivX)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
Copy Music (MP3)
Update CD database on HDD
Copying music from a CD
SELECT
RETURN
OK
[CD] > [HDD]
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music
(MP3)” and press [OK].
≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
≥Audio quality: LPCM
≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to
“USB#HDD” and “MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.
3 Register MP3 files for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 4).
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
You can register MP3 files or MP3 file folders.
≥MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same list.
1 Insert a music CD.
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
The menu is automatically displayed.
Track
Track/Folder
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total = 0)
USB ꢀꢁHDD
CD
Copy Mode
MUSIC High Speed
2
Play Music
Copy Music
Create List
3
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
SELECT
OPTION
RETURN
RETURN
OK
∫ To register individual MP3 files
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
and press [OK].
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
P O W E R E D B Y
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
5 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 53)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be
recorded.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT9088
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track/Folder” and press [OK].
To update the Gracenote® Database
To update the database with information on CDs that were recently
released, follow the instructions below.
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Cancel All
Track
Track/Folder
1 Copy Direction
No. Size
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
∫ Preparing the update data
USB ꢀꢁHDD
1
Visit the following website.
Copy Mode
2
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
2
Download the data to your USB memory.
≥USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.
≥Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.
ctoHD
i
s
u
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
∫ Updating the database on this unit
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
ingm
3
4
Turn on this unit.
Insert the USB memory (➡ 14).
The menu is automatically displayed.
y
6 Press [OK].
Cop
USB device
≥To edit the copying list (➡ below)
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Play Video (DivX)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
Copy Music (MP3)
Update CD database on HDD
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
≥For individual files only
SELECT
When specifying an existing folder as the copying
destination
RETURN
OK
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press
[OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Update” and press [OK].
≥Updating takes up to 20 minutes.
≥Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains lead
while updating.
When creating a new folder as the copying destination
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
2 Enter the folder name (➡ 44, Entering text).
≥Once started, you cannot cancel updating.
A message appears when updating is finished.
Press [OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
7
press [OK] to start copying.
[Note]
To stop copying
≥Timer recordings do not start while updating.
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
≥Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of
whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make
sure you download the latest version from the website.
≥Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted
after updating the database.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
[Note]
≥The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the copy list
may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following the existing MP3
files.
≥No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD title
information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the
CD title information of that CD is added to the database by
updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/
album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)
≥Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading
the Gracenote® Database and providing it through the Web may be
discontinued without notice.
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 3–5 (for a MP3 file) (➡ 52,
Delete All
Copying music from a USB memory) or 3–6 (for a
folder) (➡ above).
1 Press [OPTION].
Add
Delete
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1
Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file or folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
2
Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (➡ 52, Copying music from a USB
memory)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.
[Note]
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 13), copying
will stop partway through.
RQT9088
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using on-screen menus/Status message
Audio attribute
LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
Signal type
Using on-screen menus
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Number of channels
Common procedures
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
DAN: Danish
POR: Portuguese
THA: Thai
1 Press [DISPLAY].
POL: Polish
CES: Czech
SLK: Slovak
HUN: Hungarian
FIN: Finnish
RUS: Russian
JPN: Japanese
CHI: Chinese
KOR: Korean
MAL: Malay
Disc
CꢃDigital 2/0 ch
1
Soundtrack
Play
Off
Subtitle
Picture
Sound
Other
L R
Audio channel
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
¢:
Others
VIE: Vietnamese
Menu
Item
Setting
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
Repeat Play
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
≥All
≥Chapter
[CD] [VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
press [1].
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
MP3 (except [USB])
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [VCD] and MP3 (except [USB])
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
≥Track
Select “Off” to cancel.
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Soundtrack§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Playback NR
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V]
Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive§ (➡ 84)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
Subtitle§
[DVD-V]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 84, Film and video).
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ right,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
≥Auto:
≥Video:
≥Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
Angle§ [DVD-V]
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
(➡ 28, Changing audio during play)
Source Select (DivX)
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
to the right, then select “Auto”.
When the output signal is NTSC
≥Automatic:
≥Auto1
(normal):
≥Auto2:
Automatically detects the film and video
The constructing method of the DivX contents is
automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace:
content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Select when the disc contents were recorded using
interlace.
≥Progressive:
Select when the disc contents were recorded using
progressive.
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.
Input NR
PBC (Playback control ➡ 84) [VCD]
Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue
channels).
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
≥Automatic:
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape.
the menus (➡ 16) on the disc.
≥On:
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
Noise reduction works for input video.
≥Off:
change when there is no recording.
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.
RQT9088
§
Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 64).
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and
sound effect
Status messages
Press [STATUS ].
DVB Multi Audio
The display changes each time you press the button.
e
[Digital channel only]
g
a
s
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
≥DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
s
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory
HDD
REC
PLAY
The remaining time appears here while stopped.
me
Recording or play status/input channel
us
t
1 DVB
ABC
Channel (Analogue broadcast)
The name of the station (Digital broadcast only).
Sta
≥English
≥Italian
≥Spanish
≥German
≥French
/
s
L R
u
n
≥Original§
Selected audio type
DVD REC
§“Original” is displayed when a broadcast is only available in
the original language.
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
me
n
e
V.S.S.
e
r
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›]
Title number and elapsed time during play/
c
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)
Date and time
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround
function on the connected equipment.)
≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.
igon-s
ꢊ
Remain
18:53:50 11.10.
13:50 XP
Us
ꢊ T1 0:05.14 XP ꢊ T2 0:00.10 XP
Dialogue Enhancer
Title number and elapsed time during recording/
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX
Recording mode
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
≥When using Pause Live TV
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
The time when the picture currently displayed on the
television was broadcasted
Other menu—Change the DVB subtitle and display
position
Play 15:05:13
Live 15:10:46
Current time
Position
1–5:
The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.
No display
RQT9088
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EX88 model only.
Setting the protection
[RAM]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[SD]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Common procedures
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
1
While stopped
Protection” and press [OK].
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
press [OK].
and press [OK].
DVD
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Management
FUNCTION MENU
DVD-RAM
HDD
Remain 30:00 SP
Timer Recording
G-Code Record
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Disc Name
Playback
Recording
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
On
Delete
Copy
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
Setup
SELECT
To Others
OK
OK
Format Disc
RETURN
HDD Management
RETURN
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-
protected.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
To return to the previous screen
Management”, “DVD Management” or
Press [RETURN].
“Card Management” and press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Management
DVD-RAM
Cartridge-protection
Disc Name
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Off
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
SELECT
PROTECT
unit.
OK
Format Disc
RETURN
[SD]
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is
displayed.
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK”
position.
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(➡ 44, Entering text)
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
Documentary
My favorite
01
01/02
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
02
Chapter
Chapter
1
2
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9088
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
Deleting all the contents—Format
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
[SD]
nt
Preparation
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 56, Setting the protection).
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 56, Setting the protection).
me
ge
na
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56, Common procedures)
[Note]
ma
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
d
r
a
titles” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
ndc
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56, Common procedures)
a
c
press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
,dis
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [OK].
press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
HD
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
4 Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc or the card unusable.
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be
deleted.
4 Press [OK].
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9088
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDD, disc and card management
After finalising
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 57) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-
minute)§ chapters, if
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-
Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
Top Menu List
Before
After
finalising
finalising
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Play on other players
≤
–
–
≤
1
2
3
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Display after finalising
01
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 39,
Change Thumbnail)
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Auto-Play Select
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left)
before creating top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
“Title 1” and press [OK].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the
top menu.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
press [OK].
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalising the disc.
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
4 Press [OK].
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
[Note]
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
4 Press [OK].
[Note]
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
RQT9088
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
To delete channels on a group
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and
Common procedures
press the “Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
group.
1
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [OK] to save the group.
ings
t
e
Deleting a channel from a group does not affect the channel
itself. You can still select the channel from the “All Services”
group.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”
s
s
and press [OK].
To change the name of a group in the “Favourite”
column
unit’
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
e
1 Press [1]§.
press [OK].
2 Press the “Red” button.
(➡ 44, Entering text)
Menus
Options
Tabs
§ When the station name of the “All Services” column is highlighted
ingth
Setup
Comb Filter
Still Mode
On
Automatic
On
∫ Auto-Setup Restart
ha
C
/
Seamless Play
Download from TV
Tuning
nt
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 9) fails for some
reason.
Disc
Picture
Sound
e
m
e
However, if you perform “Auto-Setup Restart”, the order of analogue
channels will change.
Display
Connection
Others
TAB
g
SELECT
OK
RETURN
na
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA
Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with an HDMI cable.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
ma
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
d
r
press [1].
a
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Auto-Setup screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
ndc
press [OK].
a
c
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and
,dis
press [OK].
HD
∫ Settings for Digital Services
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto-Setup could not
complete successfully.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].
Tuning
DVB Manual Tuning
Channel System
Australia
∫ Edit Favourites
You can create four groups of channels for making viewing and
recording easier. Editing these groups does not affect the channel
setting itself.
Frequency
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
DVB CH24
498,0 MHz
10
10
0
0
Prog. Channel Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the groups
during timer recording standby.
Press the “Green” button to select the groups.
START SCAN
OFFSET
CHANNEL
RETURN
Edit Favourites
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.
3 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.
≥The frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.5 MHz.
≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays.
All Services
2A ABC
20A ABC HDTV
Favourites 1
[Refer to “Signal Condition” (➡ 60) for signal quality and signal
strength.]
4 Press [OK] to start scan.
Favourite Select
Add
Add All
SELECT
Page +
Page -
RETURN
The set channel is displayed in the table.
5 Press [EXIT] and press [W X CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
To add channels to a group
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Services” column
and press the “Yellow” button.
Add New DVB Services
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the
group. (This function is available only when no channels have
been added to the group.)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add New DVB Services” and press [OK].
The unit starts searching for newly available terrestrial digital
channels. This takes about 5 minutes.
2 Press [OK] to save the group.
To change the order of channels of a group
1 Press [1]§.
Add New DVB Services
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to
move and press the “Green” button.
Please wait!
Ch 6
69
Prog. Channel
Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press
the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the group.
RETURN: to cancel
RETURN
A message is displayed when the search is finished.
“No new services found.” is displayed when no new services can
be found.
RQT9088
2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Signal Condition
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
∫ Settings for Analogue Services
Press [OK] to show the following setting.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
Manual Tuning
You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel
details.
1
2
Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
Press [OK] to show Manual Tuning screen.
Manual Tuning
3
Display the Setup menu again (➡ 59).
Pos Name Ch
Pos Name Ch
1
2
3
ARD
ZDF
N3
4
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Press [3, 4] to select “Signal Condition” and press [OK].
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
5
8
4
5
HR3
BR3
10
6
7
8
9
SELECT
OK
2 ABC 2W DVB CH30
RETURN
Signal Quality
0
0
10
10
10
Delete
Signal Strength
CH +
CH –
RETURN
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red): The signal quality is so poor that there may
be interference in the pictures and sound.
2–5 (display orange): The signal quality is basically adequate, but
brief interference in the pictures and sound
To change the tuning settings for individual programme
position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
is possible in isolated case.
[OK].
Over 5 (display green): Optimum picture and sound quality.
Pos
Name
Channel
Fine Tuning
Mono
1
ARD
4
Auto
Off
Manual
Tuning
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
≥When the signal is weak:
SELECT
RETURN
–adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
–adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu (➡ 59).
–check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
RETURN : leave
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Pos
Programme position in the table
(You cannot change the programme position.)
Name
To enter or change the name of a TV
station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name
and press [OK].
If the station name needs a blank space,
select the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
Channel
To enter newly available TV stations or
change the channel number of an already
tuned TV station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to
enter the channel number of the desired TV
station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV
station has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[OK].
Fine Tuning
Mono
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning
condition and press [OK].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo
sound is distorted due to inferior reception
conditions, or if you want to record the normal
(mono) sound during a stereo, bilingual
broadcast, and press [OK].
RQT9088
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings for Recording
Disc
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(➡ 21, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
Settings for Playback
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[EP (6 Hours)]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
ings
t
e
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.
Do not forget your password.
[EP (8 Hours)]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
s
s
≥The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than
when using “EP (8 Hours)”.
unit’
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
e
[8 No Limit]
[1 to 7]
All DVD-Video can be played.
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including
ingth
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
Cha
[16:9]
[4:3]
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Level]
[Change Password]
[Temporary Unlock]
≥When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec
for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded
in the original aspect ratio.
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
–When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
Soundtrack
[English]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
Rec for High Speed Copy
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted
(➡ below).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is effective when recording from a television
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or
when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
Subtitle
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on that disc.
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
[On]
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded
titles.
Menus
[English]
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
–Recordings are made using the aspect ratio
set in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ above).
–Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 62).
–You are no longer able to switch the audio
when watching a programme on an input
channel on the TV connected to this unit.
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
§
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (➡ 73) with the numbered buttons.
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the
default language is played. There are discs where you can only
switch the language from the menu screen (➡ 16).
[Off]
[DVD-V]
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X
discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal (Silent)]
The noise generated by this unit is less
than when “Maximum” is selected,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).
RQT9088
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
Digital Audio Output
Picture
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 69).
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Comb Filter
PCM Down Conversion
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➡ 64).
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if
the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the
disc has copy protection.
[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this
setting.
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Still Mode
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (➡ 84,
Frames and fields).
[Automatic]
Dolby Digital
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be
seen clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The
picture is clearer and finer.)
[Bitstream]
When connecting to equipment displaying the
Dolby Digital logo.
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
[PCM]
When connecting to equipment not displaying the
Dolby Digital logo.
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
DTS
Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal
and outputs it as 2 channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may
result in noise.
[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
[Bitstream]
When connecting to equipment displaying the
DTS logo.
Sound
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
[PCM]
When connecting to equipment not displaying the
DTS logo.
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
MPEG
Select how to output the signal.
[On]
[Off]
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
Bilingual Audio Selection
(Analogue broadcast only)
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
≥Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in
MPEG decoder.
≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
≥Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ right, “Audio Mode for
XP Recording”).
Audio Mode for XP Recording
[M 1]
[M 2]
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ right).
[Dolby Digital] (➡ 84) [LPCM] (➡ 84)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that
of normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
input terminal (➡ 23).
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).
RQT9088
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (➡ 15) disappears automatically.
The length of time the control panel (➡ 37) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
ings
t
e
s
s
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
unit’
e
Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
[On]
[Off]
ingth
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 65) to “On”.
Cha
[Bright]
[Dim]
[Automatic]
The display turns dark during play and disappears when
the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily if a button
is pressed. While using this mode, the standby power
consumption can be reduced.
New Service Message (➡ 15)
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
and all created groups are deleted. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.).
[Automatic]
[Off]
The service messages are not shown.
Pause Live TV Icon
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen
icon while using the Pause Live TV function.
[On]
[Off]
RQT9088
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
HDMI Settings
Connection
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
TV Aspect
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must
also be 1080p compatible.
Set to match the type of television connected.
[16:9]
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed
for 16:9 picture.
[576i/480i] [576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
[1080p]
When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend
using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less
than 5.0 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television. 16:9 picture is shown in
the letterbox style.
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Progressive
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma
television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan.
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1
(without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.
[On]
[Off]
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
[Note]
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube)
or a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is
progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some
flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it
(➡ 54).
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with
side panels.
Digital Audio Output
[HDMI and Optical]
[Optical Only]
Select when this unit is connected to an
TV System
amplifier with an optical digital audio cable
and connected to a TV with an HDMI cable
and you want to enjoy the highest quality of
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles
on the HDD.
audio from discs (
➡
69).
[PAL]
≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as
PAL 60.
VIERA Link
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
≥[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on
the HDD.
[On]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
≥[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded
on the HDD.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)” for
component output (progressive output).
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
[Note]
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be
used.
≥A disc or title with different “TV System” may not be able to
playback while recording or on standby for the timer recording.
You will be able to playback by changing the “TV System”
settings in that case, but to prevent failure of the timer recording,
change back the settings before the recording starts.
[Video (with component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
[S Video (with component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
[RGB 1 (without component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
[RGB 2 (without component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
AV2 Input
Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.
[Video]
[S Video]
RQT9088
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Save
Others
[On]
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to
standby (➡ 83).
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
[Off]
Remote Control
(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
–“FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 63).
–The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic
products close together.
ings
t
e
[DVD 1]
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
s
s
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or
Quick Start
unit’
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, COMPONENT
VIDEO, VIDEO or S VIDEO terminals)
e
Remote Control
Setup
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE
button is pressed while the unit is off, the Electronic Program
Guide (EPG) displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)
Press “ꢋ” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
ingth
Cha
[On]
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
[Off]
Standby power consumption is less than when this is set to
“On”.
(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.)
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:
–You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-RAM.
–You want to make other operations.
–The clock has not been set.
≥Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may
take time to display the screen.
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-
on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 31).
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 2).
[Note]
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the
main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 2).
Clock
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a
day. However, if the time is not set correctly use the settings listed
in the method below.
≥In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in
memory for approximately 60 minutes.
Clock
e.g.,
Automatic
Off
Region Selection
This screen appears while
receiving a digital broadcast.
Queensland
Time
Date
15
:
45
:
39
11 . 12 . 2008
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
CHANGE
OK
SELECT
RETURN
1
Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)
3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
[Note]
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when
“Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic
time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is
adjusted several times every day.
∫ To change the region
1
Press [3, 4] to set “Automatic” to “On” and press [OK] in step
1.
2
Press [3, 4] to select the correct region and press [OK].
Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
3
RQT9088
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the unit’s settings
System Update
In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download,
and to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit
periodically performs software updates.
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥Update data and TV Guide download information is sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,
you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update
is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot
operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC
mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.
≥TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While
the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the
unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by
switching on the unit.
TV Guide Download in Standby
[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, TV Guide data
is downloaded automatically.
[Off]
Software Update in Standby
[On]
When you set this unit to standby mode, software
updates are downloaded automatically.
[Off]
TV Guide/Software search period
Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download
and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only
be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software
Update in Standby” is set to “On”.
≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.
[Automatic]
The unit will give priority to searching for TV
Guide download and update data at midnight.
[02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00]
[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]
Software Update Search Now
Start the search for new software manually.
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn
your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of
data. A message shows that the update has finished.
If a new software version is not going to be broadcast for the next
few days, a corresponding message also appears.
≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
[Yes]
[No]
Default Settings
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
region settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
[Yes]
[No]
List of TV Reception Channels
Tuner
Channel
VHF
0–12
6–12
UHF
CATV
System
Coverage
PAL–B
DVB–T
Australia
Analogue
28–69
27–69
45 MHz to
470 MHz
Australia
Digital
–
RQT9088
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Settings
2 Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
ings
t
DVD
Se
TV
r
[Note]
Volume
VOL
CH
Turn TV on/off
Input select
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
DRIVE
the
SELECT
AV
Channel
Select
/O
PAGE
CH
2 3
1
ings
4 5 6
Child Lock
t
e
s
s
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
1 Point the remote control at the
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the
unit’s display.
unit’
e
television
While pressing [ TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
01:
[0] ➡ [1]
10:
[1] ➡ [0]
ingth
Manufacturer and Code No.
Cha
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
Code
01/02/03/04
35
Brand
Code
05/28
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
05/19/20/47
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”
disappears.
AKAI
27/30
24
36
33
BEJING
BEKO
33
NEC
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX
74
BENQ
58/59
NOKIA
25/26/27/
60/61
BP
09
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
10
BRANDT
BUSH
10/15
05
45
ONWA
30/39/70
05
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
66
ORION
69
PEONY
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
05
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
64/65
05
05
37/38
52
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
05
10/34
61
05
RADIOLA
SABA
05
21
10
53
SALORA
SAMSUNG
26
63/67
32/42/43/
65/68
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
SANSUI
SANYO
05
05
36
09
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
SCHNEIDER
SEG
05/69/75/
76/77/78
HIKONA
HITACHI
52
SELECO
05/25
18
05/22/23/40/ SHARP
41
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
09
05
08
JINGXING
TCL
31/33/66/
67/69
JVC
17/30/39/70
TELEFUNKEN
10/11/12/
13/14
KDS
52
TEVION
52
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
45
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
52
62
10/15/44
16/57
05
05/50/51
07/46
LOEWE
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
RQT9088
MAG
52
YAMAHA
18/41
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
§
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
Connecting a television with S VIDEO
terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
Television’s rear panel
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
AUDIO IN
Y
COMPONENT
R
L
VIDEO IN
Television’s rear panel
PB
PR
Red White
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
R
L
IN
IN
Component
video cable
Red White
ꢁ
Audio/Video
cable
ꢁ (included)
S Video
cable
ꢁ
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Red White
RF
IN
Y
ꢁ
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
Red White
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 84) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
[Required]setting]
“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 64)
This unit’s rear panel
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned
about it (➡ 54). This is the same for multi system televisions using
PAL mode.
CRT
DO NOT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Progressive output
This unit
RQT9088
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting an amplifier with a digital
input terminal
Connecting a stereo amplifier
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
ions
t
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 62)
c
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➡ 64).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
one
c
l
Amplifier’s rear panel
a
n
o
i
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
AUDIO IN
dit
R
L
d
A
Red White
Amplifier’s rear panel
OPTICAL IN
Audio cable
Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
Red White
Y
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
This unit’s rear panel
(
)
This unit’s rear panel
AV2 EXT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S
VIDEO
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [➡ 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
Receiver’s rear panel
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
HDMI cable
HDMI AV OUT
[Required]setting]
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to
“HDMI and Optical” (➡ 64).
(The default setting is “HDMI and
Optical”.)
RF
IN
Y
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
This unit’s rear panel
[Note]
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 84) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9088
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional connections
Connecting a television and VCR
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the
21-pin Scart cable.
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or
video cassette recorder to the television, video
signal will be affected by copyright protection
systems and the picture may not be shown
correctly.
DO NOT
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with
a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB output on
this unit.
Television
[Required]setting]
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 64)
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the
21-pin Scart cable.
≥When connecting to a television with a
built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television
side if there are both television and VCR input
terminals.
VCR
This unit
[Required]setting]
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (➡ 64)
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR
Analogue television’s rear panel
To the aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yellow
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Other connections
(➡ 8, 68)
1
5
6
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Aerial cable
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
Y
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITTSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
Red White Yellow
This unit’s rear panel
Audio/Video cable
RFcoaxial cable
2
4
3
RFcoaxial cable
(included)
Red White Yellow
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VCR’s rear panel
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
RQT9088
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a Digital television and VCR
To the aerial
Aerial cable
Digital television’s rear panel
ions
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
t
c
Splitter
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
one
Red White Yellow
4
c
l
Aerial cable
a
n
o
i
AC mains lead
dit
(included)
d
A
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
1
5
6
Other connections
(➡ 8, 68)
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Aerial cable
Cooling fan
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
Y
PB
AV1
(
)
TV
PR
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BIITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(
)
AV2 EXT
Red White Yellow
This unit’s rear panel
RFcoaxial cable
(included)
Audio/Video cable
2
3
Red White Yellow
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L
VCR’s rear panel
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
RQT9088
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
Page
—
Which aerial is suitable for receiving
digital terrestrial broadcasts?
≥You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the area where you live, a new
aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer.
Can this unit receive or record High
Definition (HD) broadcasts?
≥No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
—
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.
69
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.
69
68
The television has both S VIDEO IN
terminal and COMPONENT VIDEO IN
terminals. Which terminal should I
connect with?
≥Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a more vivid picture
compared to connecting with the S Video out terminal.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.
Is my television progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
—
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs
bought in another country?
≥You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “4” or “ALL”.
Cover
—
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.
≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
10–11
—
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW ≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
11, 13
—
compatibility with this unit.
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG).
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording
—
—
is usually not possible.
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW recorded on this unit be played on
other equipment?
≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
—
Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion: On
62
–Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
—
(Analogue broadcast only)
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.
28
62
45
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
≥Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the
programme.)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.
RQT9088
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide
Page
24
Is it possible to programme a recording, ≥You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer Recording
with a start and end time that are
different from the TV Guide system?
menu.
Can I receive TV Guide system data via ≥No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite receivers or Set
a connected satellite receiver or a Set
Top Box?
24
25
Top Boxes, please use your unit’s manual timer programming.
ions
t
s
How can I cancel a TIMER
programming?
≥Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then press [DELETE ¢].
que
What happens when I unplug the unit
from the household mains socket?
≥The TV Guide data will not be updated.
—
—
d
e
k
s
≥If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for a longer period of time,
the TV Guide data will be lost.
≥Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
—
a
y
l
USB
nt
What can or cannot be done using the
USB port on this unit?
≥You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory.
≥You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.
30
50
52
49
—
—
que
e
Fr
≥[EX88] You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM
≥Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.
≥Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this
unit.
≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
12
Music
What will happen if I try to record the
same CD multiple times?
≥New album will be made following the existing album.
—
—
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD ≥No, you cannot.
to the disc or USB memory?
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
6566 Catalan:
6565 Chinese:
6570 Corsican:
8381 Croatian:
6577 Czech:
6582 Danish:
7289 Dutch:
6583 English:
6589 Esperanto:
6590 Estonian:
6665 Faroese:
6985 Fiji:
6765 Gujarati:
9072 Hausa:
6779 Hebrew:
7282 Hindi:
6783 Hungarian:
6865 Icelandic:
7876 Indonesian:
6978 Interlingua:
6979 Irish:
7185 Lingala:
7265 Lithuanian:
7387 Macedonian:
7273 Malagasy:
7285 Malay:
7383 Malayalam:
7378 Maltese:
7365 Maori:
7165 Marathi:
7384 Moldavian:
7465 Mongolian:
7487 Nauru:
7578 Nepali:
7583 Norwegian:
7575 Oriya:
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:
7579 Persian:
7585 Polish:
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:
Tamil:
8465
7684
8277 Tatar:
8279 Telugu:
8285 Thai:
8377 Tibetan:
8365 Tigrinya:
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
7775 Romanian:
7771 Russian:
7783 Samoan:
7776 Sanskrit:
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:
6984 Italian:
7779 Shona:
7778 Sindhi:
7865 Singhalese:
7869 Slovak:
7879 Slovenian:
7982 Somali:
8378 Twi:
8368 Ukrainian:
8373 Urdu:
7079 Japanese:
7074 Javanese:
7073 Kannada:
7082 Kashmiri:
7089 Kazakh:
7176 Kirghiz:
7565 Korean:
6869 Kurdish:
6976 Laotian:
7576 Latin:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Finnish:
8375 Uzbek:
8376 Vietnamese:
8379 Volapük:
6983 Welsh:
8385 Wolof:
8387 Xhosa:
8386 Yiddish:
8476 Yoruba:
8471 Zulu:
6678 French:
6890 Frisian:
6672 Galician:
6682 Georgian:
6671 German:
7789 Greek:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
7065 Sundanese:
8076 Swahili:
8084 Swedish:
8065 Tagalog:
8185 Tajik:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:
7679 Portuguese:
7665 Punjabi:
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:
RQT9088
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages
Page
30
On the television
Authorisation Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.
—
—
21
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded.
Cannot playback.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
64
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.
Cannot record to the disc.
Unable to format.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
14
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
13
14
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
19, 39,
57
Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.
≥Use a new disc.
—
—
13
14
12
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
[EX88]
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
19, 39,
43, 57
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
48, 51,
53
This is a non-recordable disc.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
10
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTION MENU.
57
—
Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 499.
19
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unwanted titles.
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)
31
—
$
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
RQT9088
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
Page
65
DVD
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
es
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
g
a
es
GUIDE
≥TV Guide data is being downloaded.
66
—
—
M
HARD ERR§
NoERAS
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
14
5
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
—
—
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAIT§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait
until the message disappears.
PROG FULL§
REMOVE
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
25
—
—
≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”,”LP” and the numbers
are examples.
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP
151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151
hours”.
SW-DL
≥The unit is performing a software update.
66
57
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL, or DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
UNSUPPORT§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
10–11
12
F74
F75
U59
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
—
—
—
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.
U61
U76
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
—
≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright
protection.
—
—
U80
U81
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now
press [/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
76
H or F
≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s
condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the
following.
—
76–82
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.
67
§
The message are alternately displayed.
RQT9088
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being
activated. (Press and hold [/I] on the main unit for 10
seconds.)
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
≥Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
Power
Page
No power.
≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.
8, 70, 71
The unit does not turn on
pressing [ DVD].
The unit switches to standby
mode.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.
—
The power is turned off
automatically.
≥If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, this unit will
be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.
36
Displays
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
63
65
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
≥Set the clock.
The time recorded on the disc
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
—
—
and the available time shown do ≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is ≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no
different from the actual increase in disc space.
recording time or MP3 recording ≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
time.
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
—
—
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
—
The clock is not correct.
≥Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not work.
In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting
does not work, set the time manually.
65
Compared to the actual recorded ≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
—
—
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1
Press [/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [/I] on the main unit for about
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W]on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
2
TV screen and video
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
—
The digital channel information or ≥Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) that the “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu will
63
control panel does not appear.
be displayed.
≥The digital channel information will not appear during playback or recording.
≥Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel information.
≥The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI
Control 3” function.
—
—
37
The grey background does not
appear.
≥Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.
63
—
54
Picture does not appear during
timer recording.
≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.
≥By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
≥Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.
64
64
61
Screen size is wrong.
61
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
The screen changes
automatically.
≥The display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for
5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.
—
RQT9088
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV screen and video (continued)
Page
—
The recorded title is stretched
vertically.
≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
—
61
– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed
Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”.
– By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
61
nguide
hot
s
There is a lot of after-image when ≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
54
54
le
playing video.
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
oub
r
T
There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the on-
screen menus.
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
—
The images from this unit do not ≥Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal, S VIDEO OUT
8, 68,
70, 71
—
appear on the television.
terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds
to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
—
Picture is distorted.
≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While
stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
64
≥When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV
system.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
—
—
The picture is distorted during
play, or video will not play
correctly.
≥You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavorable weather
conditions.
≥The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in
the following situations:
—
—
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
Sound
No sound.
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
8, 62, 64,
68, 69,
70, 71
28
Low volume.
amplifier if you have connected one.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.
55
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected
with an HDMI cable.
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
—
—
—
64
—
61
Cannot switch audio.
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
—
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”).
≥The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables.
62
61
62, 69
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
—
RQT9088
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Operation
Page
67
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
control.
65
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time
for more than 5 seconds.
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
4
4
—
—
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.
65
67
67
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
16, 17
—
—
—
1Press [/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [/I] on the main unit for about
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the
dealer.
Cannot eject disc.
≥The unit is recording.
—
67
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W]on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.
Cannot tune channels.
≥Check the connections.
≥You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with a HDMI cable to
download channel presets.
8, 70, 71
—
Cannot download channel
presets from the television.
Startup is slow.
≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations:
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
65
—
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
RQT9088
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording, timer recording and copying
Page
10
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD
Management.
57
56
≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
84
19, 39,
57
nguide
—
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
HDD and then copy.
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 499.
≥You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
19, 39,
57
hot
s
le
oub
r
T
—
—
—
—
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded
with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
≥Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
—
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
≥Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
23, 70, 71
—
Timer recording does not work
properly.
≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the
25
25
programme.
≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording
list is not on.)
≥Set the clock.
≥The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be correct. It is recommended
to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes.
65
24
Timer recording does not stop
even when [∫] is pressed.
≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive.
≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
25
—
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.
—
57
The programme name and the
recorded title do not match.
≥There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has
the old programme name.
—
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
disc using the high speed mode.
≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The
default setting is “On”).
≥In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if the titles were recorded with
“Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
61
—
–[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect.
–[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours
or longer) mode.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
—
—
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.
≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.
—
—
An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.
≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
—
The DV automatic recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.
23
—
—
—
23
RQT9088
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
Play
Page
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
14
14
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
10–11
—
—
61
—
31
—
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
≥Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed, follow the
on-screen instructions.
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
—
—
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
—
10
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-Video is not played.
≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
≥Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.
61
Cover
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
—
16
No subtitles.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
—
54
Angle cannot be changed.
≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
—
—
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE
SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main
unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
Quick View does not work.
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
—
—
The resume play function does
not work.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when
–press [∫] several times.
—
–open the disc tray.
–[SD] ([EX88])
[CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the power.
–if a recording or timer recording was executed.
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during
search.
64
—
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does ≥These functions do not work with finalised discs.
—
64
not work.
≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title
recorded on the disc.
It takes time before play starts.
Picture stops.
≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
—
—
—
Cannot see the beginning of the ≥(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
title played.
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the
beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [], return to the
beginning of the title.
Edit
Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.
≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
19
—
Cannot edit.
≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
19
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
14
10–11
Cannot create chapters.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before
a start point.
—
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.
—
—
Cannot delete chapters.
Cannot create a playlist.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
39
—
≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.
Music
Tracks could not be copied to
the HDD.
≥If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not be copied.
≥Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.)
cannot be guaranteed.
—
—
≥Bonus tracks may not be copied.
—
—
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not
completely displayed.
≥Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit.
RQT9088
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Still pictures
Page
—
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
Cannot edit or format a card.
≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
56
—
([EX88])
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
The contents of the card cannot
be read.
([EX88])
≥Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn
off and turn on the unit again.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.) 12, 13
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and
FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.
nguide
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this
unit.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards
with capacities from 4 GB to 16 GB.
≥This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or MPEG4 on an SD card.
12
—
—
hot
s
le
oub
r
T
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
([EX88])
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
—
57
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or
card.
USB
The contents of the USB memory ≥Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this does not solve the
—
cannot be read.
problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
≥Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly.
≥The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the unit. (The
contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)
≥The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible
with this unit.
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may not be
recognized by this unit.
14
12, 13
13
—
—
≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
≥If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may not be
recognized by this unit.
12
—
TV Guide
The TV Guide System does not
receive any data.
≥Check whether the clock is properly set.
≥If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the TV Guide system may not be
able to receive any data.
65
—
“No Data” is displayed for some ≥Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
—
—
24
or all stations.
≥Analogue broadcasts are not supported by the TV Guide system.
≥Programme the Timer recording manually or via G-CODE.
The TV Guide information is not
displayed properly.
≥There was a programme change.
—
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV Guide system provider or
station provider.
≥Programme information about analogue broadcasts is not displayed.
—
The TV Guide data transfer was
interrupted.
≥The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to the interruption.
≥The programme information may be incomplete.
—
—
The TV Guide data is not
updated.
≥Make sure that the time is set correctly.
≥Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in Standby” and change the setting in
the Setup menu.
—
66
Digital broadcast
Digital broadcasts cannot be
received.
≥Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
≥The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the direction of the aerial
may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV
aerial installer.
—
—
After DVB Auto-Setup only some ≥Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
—
—
8
or no DVB channels are found.
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
Use the included RF coaxial cable as shown in STEP 1.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licenced installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF aerial should be
adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception
performance.
≥If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master Antenna TV (MATV) system is
designed for analogue and DVB-T reception. Please consult your body corporate.
—
Picture regularly breaks up on
some channels. “No Signal”
message is displayed.
≥Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed in red or
constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
≥Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
60
—
8
Use the included RF coaxial cable as shown in STEP 1.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/installed by a licenced installer that
should comply with Australian Standard AS1417.1.
≥Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as light switches,
fridges etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad
shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse
noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
≥Check aerial connection.
—
—
59
≥Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup menu.
Picture very infrequently breaks ≥Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms or heavy rain
—
up on some or all channels.
with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
≥Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a passing
vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.
—
RQT9088
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
Page
—
≥Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when
the power for the main unit is set to On.
≥Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
64
—
—
≥Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
≥Some functions may not work if depending on the version of “HDAVI Control” of the connected
equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” functions.
≥If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a
power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may
not work.
—
In this case, perform the following operations.
1When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV (VIERA)
on again.
2Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on
again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is
displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.
The operation on this unit (music ≥The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote
—
playback etc.) is interrupted.
control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset
≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings
level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning
settings, clock settings, region settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Auto-Setup screen appears. All
the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock settings return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
66
66
—
To reset the ratings level
settings
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and
—
—
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety devices
being activated
≥Press and hold [/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)
Other
After performing an update, you ≥Depending on the content of the update, some settings may have returned to the preset
—
can no longer receive
broadcasts.
values. Fix the settings again.
RQT9088
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
Video
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
Recording system:
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
ions
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
t
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
a
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
fic
c
e
DVD-R:
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
p
S
/
DVD-R DL:
DVD-RW:
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
ide
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
u
+R:
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
g
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
n
i
+R DL:
+RW:
Television system
hot
Recording time
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
s
Tuner system
Channel coverage
le
PAL–B
Australia
VHF: 0–12
UHF: 28–69
CATV: 45 MHz–470 MHz
[EX78]
oub
r
T
Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours
LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours
[EX88]
Maximum Approx. 712 hours with 400 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 89 hours, SP: Approx. 178 hours
LP: Approx. 357 hours, EP: Approx. 534 hours/712 hours
DVB–T
Australia
VHF: 6–12
UHF: 27–69
RF converter output:
Not provided
SD Card ([EX88])
Slot:
Compatible media:
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc
SD Memory Card§2, SDHC Memory Card,
MultiMediaCard
Playable discs
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, DivX§1
Format:
FAT12, FAT16§3
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, DivX§1
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
(In case of SD Memory Card/MultiMediaCard)
FAT32§3 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
Still picture (JPEG)
Image file format:
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD
CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, MP3§1, JPEG§1, DivX§1
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system),
Number of pixels:
Between 34 a 34 and 6144 a 4096
sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Internal HDD capacity
Optical pick-up
[EX78] 250 GB
[EX88] 400 GB
Thawing time:
Video (SD Video)§4
Codec:
Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
File Format:
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
DV input
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
USB port
USB standard:
Type A : 1 pc
[EX88] USB 2.0 High Speed
[EX78] USB 2.0 Full Speed
FAT16, FAT32
CD
DVD
Laser power:
780 nm wave length
662 nm wave length
Format:
Video (SD Video)§4 ([EX88])
Codec:
File Format:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
SD-Video format conforming
Audio
Recording system:
Audio in:
Input level:
Input impedance:
Audio out:
Output level:
Output impedance:
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Others
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Region code:
‚4
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 36 W
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkHkD):
Mass:
430 mmk59 mmk326 mm
Approx. 4.2 kg
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)
Approx. 15 W (Quick Start mode)
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMITM (V.1.3 with Deep Colour)
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.
[Note]
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
§1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
§2 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
§3 Long file name is unsupported.
§4 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card or
Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or
DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.
≥Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)
RQT9088
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Bitstream
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
u
r
Frame
Field
Field
Decoder
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD)([EX88]). These perform the reading and
writing of data.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
Film and video
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.
Pan & Scan:
The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Video:
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card ([EX88]) where
groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to
the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 ([EX88]) are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD cards ([EX88]) and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
RQT9088
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
ry
a
s
os
Gl
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,
etc.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
RQT9088
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety precautions
Foreign matter
Placement
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS
2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
≥SDHC Logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard
playback of DivX® media files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.
RQT9088
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gracenote® Corporate Description
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more
of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some
services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
ions
ut
a
c
e
pr
ty
e
f
Sa
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
R
Gracenote End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE
TERMS BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions
of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-
commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate
if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
RQT9088
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Adjust the audio quality
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 84
Properties
Music on HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 42
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Protection
Album (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Adjust the picture quality
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
(Picture menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Album (CD)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Album (Still picture)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Aspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio
Digital broadcast
(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . 26
AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 84
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 84
FR (Flexible Recording Mode). . . . . . . 21
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . 35
9
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Gracenote® database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Group (MP3)
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Channel
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 38
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cleaning
HDAVI Control. . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 64, 69
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 64, 69, 84
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 61
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DV automatic recording. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Relief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–27
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote control code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 54
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 32–33, 84
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 70–71
Amplifier, system component,
receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
DV input terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 69
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 68–71
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . 70–71
Copy
Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 39
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5
5
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 84
Manual Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–31
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mode
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 31, 84
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 34
Music on HDD
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 22
Soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Subtitle
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
System Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Delete
Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Album (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41
Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Track (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Digital Audio Output settings. . . . 62, 64
Digital broadcast
Name
Time Slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–27
Tuning
Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TV Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TV System (PAL/NTSC). . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Entering text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 39
New service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 63
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 15
DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
New service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 63
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Select the channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Direct Navigator. . . . . . . . . 29, 32, 38, 42
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11
Display
USB
Copy (Music). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copy (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Supported formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 64, 69
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 15
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 30–31, 84
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DVB Multi Audio
Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
p
RQT9088-L
F0408YU0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|